Ricoh All in One Printer SP C250SF User Guide

Operating Instructions  
For safe and correct use, be sure to read "Safety Information" before using the machine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
...................................................................................................... 13  
.......................................................................................................16  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................371  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Read This Manual  
Introduction  
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your  
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy  
place for quick reference.  
Legal Prohibition  
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.  
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:  
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.  
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its  
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing  
certain items, consult with your legal advisor.  
This machine is equipped with a function that prevents making counterfeit bank bills. Due to this function  
the original images similar to bank bills may not be copied properly.  
Disclaimer  
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be  
liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or  
operating the machine.  
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any  
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or  
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.  
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or  
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.  
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or  
any results from the data executed by you.  
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the  
manufacturer.  
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of  
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.  
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Some illustrations or explanations in this guide may differ from your product due to improvement or  
change in the product.  
Differences in Functions between Different Models  
The differences in main functions between different models are as follows:  
SP C250SF  
Type 1  
SP C252SF  
Type 2  
Type  
Restrictions on available functions  
User Restriction  
Locked Print  
Not available  
Not available  
Not available  
Not available  
Not available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Internet Fax  
Paperless FAX  
(Reception file setting, Print received file, Print forwarded file,  
Notify forward status)  
Notification to replace a component  
Not available  
Available  
(Fusing unit, Transfer roller, Intermediate transfer belt)  
Note to Administrator  
Password  
Certain configurations of this machine can be password-protected to prevent unauthorized modifications  
by others. We strongly recommend you to create your own password immediately.  
The following are the operations that can be password-protected:  
• Configuring the [Address Book], [Network Settings], or [Admin. Tools] menu using the control  
panel  
You can access these menus without a password by factory default.  
The setting for creating a password can be found in [Admin. Tools].  
• Configuring the [System Settings], [Quick Dial Destination], [Scan Destination], [Fax Speed Dial  
Destination], [Special Sender], [Restrict Available Functions], [Network Settings], [IPsec Settings],  
or [Administrator Tools] menu using Web Image Monitor  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
By default, the access to the machine via Web Image Monitor is not password-protected.  
The setting for configuring the password can be found in [Administrator Settings].  
User Restriction  
You can restrict the use of certain functions of this machine to users with proper authentication.  
Using Web Image Monitor, you can select the functions you want to restrict, and register the users who  
can use that function upon authentication.  
About IP Address  
In this manual, "IP address" covers both IPv4 and IPv6 environments. Read the instructions that are  
relevant to the environment you are using.  
List of Option  
Option List  
Paper Feed Unit TK1010  
Referred to as  
Paper feed unit  
• If Paper feed unit is attached, "Tray 2" appears on the machine's control panel.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Model-Specific Information  
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.  
There is a label on the rear of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label contains  
details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.  
DAC029  
The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to  
the region of your machine.  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region A model:  
• CODE XXXX -27  
• 220-240V  
(mainly North America)  
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region B model:  
• CODE XXXX -17  
• 120-127V  
• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a  
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch  
units.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Important Safety Instructions  
User Information on Electrical & Electronic Equipment  
Users in the countries where this symbol shown in this section has been specified in  
national law on collection and treatment of E-waste  
Our Products contain high quality components and are designed to facilitate recycling.  
Our products or product packaging are marked with the symbol below.  
The symbol indicates that the product must not be treated as municipal waste. It must be disposed of  
separately via the appropriate return and collection systems available. By following these instructions  
you ensure that this product is treated correctly and help to reduce potential impacts on the environment  
and human health, which could otherwise result from inappropriate handling. Recycling of products  
helps to conserve natural resources and protect the environment.  
For more detailed information on collection and recycling systems for this product, please contact the  
shop where you purchased it, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.  
All Other Users  
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities, the shop where you bought this  
product, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.  
Environmental Advice for Users  
Users in the EU, Switzerland and Norway  
Consumables yield  
Please refer to either the User’s Manual for this information or the packaging of the consumable.  
Recycled paper  
The machine can use recycled paper which is produced in accordance with European standard  
EN 12281:2002 or DIN 19309. For products using EP printing technology, the machine can print  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
on 64g/m paper, which contains less raw materials and represents a significant resource  
reduction.  
Duplex printing (if applicable)  
Duplex printing enables both sides of a sheet of paper to be used. This saves paper and reduces  
the size of printed documents so that fewer sheets are used. We recommend that this feature is  
enabled whenever you print.  
Toner and ink cartridge return program  
Toner and ink cartridge for recycling will be accepted free of charge from users in accordance with  
local regulations.  
For details about the return program, please refer to the Web page below or consult your service  
person.  
https://www.ricoh-return.com/  
Energy efficiency  
The amount of electricity a machine consumes depends as much on its specifications as it does on  
the way you use it. The machine is designed to allow you to reduce electricity costs by switching to  
Ready mode after it prints the last page. If required, it can immediately print again from this mode.  
If no additional prints are required and a specified period of time passes, the device switches to an  
energy saving mode.  
In these modes, the machine consumes less power (watts). If the machine is to print again, it needs  
a little longer to return from an energy saving mode than from Ready mode.  
For maximum energy savings, we recommend that the default setting for power management is  
used.  
Products that comply with the Energy Star requirement are always energy efficient.  
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)  
In accordance with the Battery Directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users Annex II,  
the above symbol is printed on batteries and accumulators.  
This symbol means that in the European Union, used batteries and accumulators should be disposed of  
separately from your household waste.  
In the EU, there are separate collection systems for not only used electrical and electronic products but  
also batteries and accumulators.  
Please dispose of them correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notes to Users of Facsimile Unit  
Declaration of Conformity  
Notice to Users in EEA Countries  
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC of  
the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and  
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.  
Notice to Users Accessing Analog PSTN in EEA Countries  
This product is designed to be able to access analog PSTN in all EEA countries. Local PSTN  
compatibility is dependent on software switch settings. Please contact your service representative if  
relocating this product to another country. In the event of problems, please contact your service  
representative in the first instance.  
The CE Declaration of Conformity is available by accessing the URL:  
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc/ and selecting the product applicable.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important Safety Instructions  
Notes to Users in the State of California  
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/  
perchlorate  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ENERGY STAR Program  
®
ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment  
®
The ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment encourage energy conservation  
by promoting energy efficient computers and other office equipment.  
The program backs the development and dissemination of products that feature energy saving  
functions.  
It is an open program in which manufacturers participate voluntarily.  
Targeted products are computers, monitors, printers, facsimiles, copiers, scanners, and multifunction  
devices. Energy Star standards and logos are internationally uniform.  
Saving Energy  
This machine is equipped with the following Energy Saver modes: Energy Saver mode 1 and Energy  
Saver mode 2. If the machine has been idle for a certain period of time, the machine automatically  
enters Energy Saver mode.  
The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a print job, prints a received fax, or  
when the [Copy], [Color Start], or [B&W Start] key is pressed.  
Energy Saver mode 1  
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 1 if the machine has been idle for about 30 seconds. It  
takes less time to recover from Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off state or Energy Saver  
mode 2, but power consumption is higher in Energy Saver mode 1 than in Energy Saver mode 2.  
Energy Saver mode 2  
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 2 after the period of time specified for this setting is  
passed. Power consumption is lower in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy Saver mode 1, but it  
takes longer to recover from Energy Saver mode 2 than from Energy Saver mode 1.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifications  
Energy Saver mode 1  
*1  
*1  
Power Consumption  
Default Time  
80 W or less  
30 seconds  
*1  
Recovery Time  
10 seconds or less  
Energy Saver mode 2  
Power Consumption  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
3.8 W or less  
(mainly North America)  
3.2 W or less  
Default Time  
1 minute  
*1  
Recovery Time  
30 seconds  
*2  
Duplex Function  
Standard  
Recovery time and power consumption may differ depending on the conditions and environment of the  
machine.  
*1  
*2  
Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used with) a  
duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.  
For details about Energy Saver modes, see page 228 "Administrator Settings".  
• If the machine is in Energy Saver mode for 24 hours continuously, the machine automatically  
returns to normal state and performs self-maintenance.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
Guide to Components  
This section introduces the names of the various parts on the front and rear side of the machine and  
outlines their functions.  
Exterior: Front View  
7
1
9
2
8
10  
3
4
11  
5
6
12  
13  
14  
DAC025  
1. ADF (Auto document feeder) Cover  
Open this cover to remove originals jammed in the ADF.  
2. Output Tray for the ADF  
Originals scanned with the ADF are delivered from here.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1. Getting Started  
3. USB Flash Disk Port  
Insert a USB flash disk for using the Scan to USB function or connect a digital camera using a USB cable for  
PictBridge printing.  
4. Control Panel  
Contains a screen and keys for machine control.  
5. Front Cover  
Open this cover to replace the waste toner bottle or remove jammed paper.  
6. Bypass Tray  
Load paper here sheet by sheet.  
7. Input Tray for the ADF  
Place stacks of originals here. They will feed in automatically. This tray can hold up to 35 sheets of plain  
paper.  
8. Extender for the ADF Tray  
Extend these when placing paper longer than A4 in the input tray for ADF.  
9. Cover for the Exposure Glass  
Open this cover to place originals on the exposure glass.  
10. Exposure Glass  
Place originals here sheet by sheet.  
11. Standard Tray/Top Cover  
Printed paper is delivered to this tray. Up to 150 sheets of plain paper can be stacked here.  
Open this to replace the print cartridges.  
12. Front Cover Open Lever  
To open the front cover, pull this lever on the right side of the machine.  
13. Tray 1  
This tray can hold up to 250 sheets of plain paper.  
14. Tray 2 (option)  
This tray can hold up to 500 sheets of plain paper.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guide to Components  
Exterior: Rear View  
9
1
2
3
4
10  
5
6
7
8
DAC026  
1. Stop Fences  
Pull up this fence to prevent paper falling off when printing a large amount of paper at a time. The fence can  
be adjusted at the A4/Letter or Legal size position.  
2. Cable Cover  
Remove this cover when connecting cables to the machine.  
3. G3 (analog) Line Interface Connector  
For connecting a telephone line.  
4. Ethernet Port  
For connecting the machine to the network using a network interface cable.  
5. USB Port  
For connecting the machine to a computer using a USB cable.  
6. External Telephone Connector  
For connecting an external telephone.  
7. Rear Cover  
Remove this cover when loading paper longer than A4 in Tray 1.  
8. Power Socket  
For connecting the power cord to the machine.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Getting Started  
9. Button for Sliding the ADF  
Press to slide the ADF towards the rear of the machine and hold it in that position, if paper output to the output  
tray is difficult to retrieve.  
10. Power Switch  
Use this switch to turn the power on or off.  
• As shown, slide the ADF while pressing the button for sliding the ADF. Be sure to check that the ADF  
is closed in advance. Be careful not to trap your fingers when sliding.  
DAC009  
• Pull up the retainer as shown below to prevent A4- or Letter-size printed copies from falling off.  
DAC034  
• Pull up the retainer as shown below to prevent Legal-size printed copies from falling off.  
1
2
3
DAC035  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guide to Components  
Interior  
1
2
3
4
5
DAC027  
1. Print Cartridges  
Install the print cartridges from the machine rear, in the order of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black  
(K). Messages appear on the screen when print cartridges need to be replaced, or new ones need to be  
prepared.  
2. Fusing Unit Lever  
Lower both the left and right levers when you print on an envelope.  
3. Fusing Unit  
Fuses toner to the paper.  
You might have to move this unit to check for or remove jammed paper.  
4. Waste Toner Bottle  
Collects toner that is wasted during printing.  
5. Transfer unit  
You need to remove this when you replace the waste toner bottle.  
• For details about the messages that appear on the screen when consumables need to be replaced,  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Getting Started  
Control Panel  
DAC504  
1. Fax Received indicator  
Lights up when received faxes that have not been printed out exist in the machine's memory. Flashes when the  
machine is unable to print out the faxes due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a paper jam.  
2. [Pause/Redial] key  
• Pause  
Press to insert a pause in a fax number. The pause is indicated by "P".  
• Redial  
Press to display the last used scan or fax destination.  
3. [On Hook Dial] key  
Press to use on-hook dialing to check the destination's status when sending a fax.  
4. [Address Book] key  
Press to select a scan or fax destination from the Address Book.  
5. [Image Quality] key  
Press to select the image quality for the current job.  
• Copier mode: select Text, Photo, or Mixed.  
• Scanner mode: select the resolution.  
• Fax mode: select Standard, Detail, or Photo.  
6. [User Tools] key  
Press to display the menu for configuring the machine's system settings.  
7. [Copy] key  
Press to switch to copier mode. The key stays lit while the machine is in copier mode.  
8. [ID Card Copy] key  
Press to enter ID card copy mode for the current job.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Guide to Components  
If you do not use the ID card copy mode frequently, configure [Shortcut to Function] in [Admin. Tools] to make  
this key available for sending faxes immediately or displaying scan file destinations. For [Shortcut to Function],  
9. Screen  
Displays the current status and messages.  
10. Scroll keys  
Press to move the cursor in the directions indicated by each scroll key.  
Pressing the [ ][ ] keys while the machine is in standby mode will display the menu for configuring the settings  
of the machine's current operation mode (copier, scanner, or fax).  
11. Number keys  
Use to enter numerical values when specifying settings such as fax numbers and copy quantities, or enter  
letters when specifying names.  
12. [Clear/Stop] key  
• While the machine is processing a job: press to cancel the current job.  
• While configuring the machine settings: press to cancel the current setting and return to standby mode.  
• While in standby mode: press to cancel temporary settings such as image density or resolution.  
13. [B&W Start] key  
Press to scan or copy in black and white, or start sending a fax.  
14. [Color Start] key  
Press to scan or copy in color.  
15. [OK] key  
Press to confirm settings or enter the next level of the menu tree.  
16. [Escape] key  
Press to cancel the last operation or exit to the previous level of the menu tree.  
17. Selection keys  
Press the key that corresponds to an item shown on the bottom line of the screen to select it.  
18. [Facsimile] key  
Press to switch to fax mode. The key stays lit while the machine is in fax mode.  
19. [Scanner] key  
Press to switch to scanner mode. The key stays lit while the machine is in scanner mode.  
20. [Density] key  
Press to adjust image density for the current job.  
• Copier mode: select from 5 levels of density.  
• Scanner mode: select from 5 levels of density.  
• Fax mode: select from 3 levels of density.  
21. [Reduce/Enlarge] key  
• Copier mode: press to specify the reduction or enlargement ratio for the current job.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
• Scanner mode: press to specify the scanning size applied to the current original.  
22. [Shift] key  
Press to switch between Quick Dial numbers 1 to 10 and 11 to 20 when specifying a scan or fax destination  
using the One Touch buttons.  
23. Alert indicator  
Flashes yellow when the machine will require maintenance soon (such as replacing consumables), or lights up  
red when a machine error occurs.  
When an alert is issued, check the messages on the screen. For details about the messages that appear on the  
24. Power indicator  
Remains lit while the power is on. It is unlit when the power is off.  
25. One Touch buttons  
Press to select a scan or fax Quick Dial destination.  
• The backlight of the screen is turned off when the machine is in Energy Saver mode.  
• When the machine is processing a job, you cannot display the menu for configuring the machine.  
You can confirm the machine's status by checking messages on the screen. If you see messages  
such as "Printing...", "B&W Copying...", "Color Copying...", or "Processing...", wait until the current  
job is finished.  
• As required, apply the stickers appropriate for your language to control panel keys and One  
Touch buttons. If the control panel is covered with a protective sheet, be sure to remove it before  
applying the stickers.  
DAC028  
• The color of the control panel varies depending on the model.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Machine  
Installing the Machine  
Where to Put the Machine  
Be careful about where to place the machine, because environmental conditions greatly affect its  
performance.  
• Do not use flammable sprays or solvents in the vicinity of this machine. Doing so could result in  
fire or electric shock.  
• Do not place vases, plant pots, cups, toiletries, medicines, small metal objects, or containers  
holding water or any other liquids, on or close to this machine. Fire or electric shock could result  
from spillage or if such objects or substances fall inside this machine.  
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might  
occur.  
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, an injury might  
occur.  
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. Doing so can cause the machine to topple over,  
possibly resulting in injury.  
• Keep the machine in an area that is within optimum environmental conditions. Operating the  
machine in an environment that is outside the recommended ranges of humidity and temperature  
can cause an electrical fire hazard. Keep the area around the socket free of dust. Accumulated  
dust can become an electrical fire hazard.  
• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and spacious. Good  
ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily.  
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal  
components.  
• Keep the machine away from salt-bearing air and corrosive gases. Also, do not install the machine  
in places where chemical reactions are likely (laboratories, etc.), as doing so will cause the  
machine to malfunction.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1. Getting Started  
Space Required for Installation  
The recommended (or minimum) space requirements are as follows:  
24 cm  
(9.5 inches)  
20 cm  
(7.9 inches)  
20 cm  
(7.9 inches)  
10 cm  
(4 inches)  
70 cm  
(27.6 inches)  
DAC022  
Optimum Environmental Conditions  
Permissible and recommended temperature and humidity ranges are as follows:  
DAC581  
• White area: Permissible Range  
• Gray area: Recommended Range  
To avoid possible build-up of ozone, locate this machine in large well ventilated room that has an  
3
air turnover of more than 30m /hr/person.  
Environments to Avoid  
• Areas exposed to direct sunlight or strong light  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Machine  
• Dusty areas  
• Areas with corrosive gases  
• Areas that are excessively cold, hot, or humid  
• Areas directly exposed to currents of hot, cold, or room-temperature air from air conditioners  
• Areas directly exposed to radiant heat from heaters  
• Locations near air conditioners or humidifiers  
• Locations near other electronic equipment  
• Locations subject to frequent strong vibration  
Ventilation  
When you use this machine in a confined space without good ventilation for a long time or print  
large quantities, you might detect an odd smell.  
This might cause the output paper to also have an odd smell.  
When you detect an odd smell, regularly ventilate in order to keep the workplace comfortable.  
• Set up the machine so that it does not directly ventilate towards people.  
3
• Ventilation should be more than 30 m /hr/person.  
New machine smell  
When a machine is new, it might have a unique smell. This smell will subside in about one week.  
When you detect an odd smell, sufficiently ventilate and circulate the air in the room.  
Power requirements  
(mainly Europe and Asia) 220 - 240 V, 6 A, 50/60 Hz  
(mainly North America) 120 - 127 V, 11 A, 60 Hz  
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
Installing Option  
This section explains how to install options.  
Attaching Paper Feed Unit  
• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and  
electric shock hazard.  
• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric  
shock.  
• Before installing or removing options, always disconnect the power cord plugs from the wall  
outlet and allow time for the main unit to fully cool. Failing to take these precautions could result  
in burns.  
• The machine weighs approximately 29.0 kg (64 lb.). When moving the machine, use the inset  
grips on both sides, and lift slowly in pairs. The machine will break or cause injury if dropped.  
• Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping may cause injury.  
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. If the cord is  
unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or cords can cause an  
electrical or fire hazard.  
• Tray 1 is required to print using the optional paper feed unit. Without Tray 1, paper jams will occur.  
• The machine must be lifted by two people.  
• Do not hold the tray to lift the machine.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installing Option  
1. Check that the package contains the paper feed unit.  
DAC047  
2. Turn off the machine's power switch, and then unplug the machine's power cord from the  
wall outlet.  
3. Remove adhesive tapes from the optional paper feed unit.  
DAC048  
4. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides of the machine.  
DAC020  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
5. There are three upright pins on the optional paper feed unit. Align them with the holes on  
the underside of the machine, and then carefully lower the machine.  
DAC049  
6. After installing the optional paper feed unit, print the configuration page to check the  
device configuration.  
If it is installed properly, "Tray 2" will appear under "Paper Input" on the configuration page.  
• After installing the optional paper feed unit, select Tray 2 in the printer driver. For details, see the  
printer driver Help.  
• If the new device is listed in the column of configuration options, it has been properly installed.  
• If the optional paper feed unit is not installed properly, try to install it again by repeating the  
procedure. If the problem persists, contact your sales or service representative.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Operation Tools  
About Operation Tools  
This section explains the operation tools of this machine.  
Control Panel  
The control panel contains a screen and keys for controlling the machine. Using the control panel, you  
can configure the machine's various settings. For details about how to use the control panel, see  
Web Image Monitor  
You can check the machine's status and configure its settings by accessing the machine via Web Image  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Getting Started  
Initial Setup  
Initial Setup  
When you turn on the machine for the first time, a menu for configuring the settings described below will  
appear on the display. This section explains how to complete the Initial Setup.  
(mainly North America): The fax number code is required by international law. You  
cannot legally connect a fax machine to the telephone system if the fax number code is not  
programmed. Also, the fax header code and the date and time of transmission must be included in  
the header of all pages faxed to, from, or within the United States.  
• Make sure to select the correct code for the country of use. Selecting the wrong country code may  
cause failures in fax transmissions.  
Display language  
The selected language here is used for displaying messages, etc.  
User fax number  
The registered number is used as the fax number of the machine. The user fax number can contain  
0 to 9, spaces, and "+".  
User name  
The name entered here is used as the name of the fax sender.  
Country code  
The selected country code is used for configuring the time and date display formats, and the  
settings related to fax transmissions with appropriate default values for the country of use.  
Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the item you want to configure, and enter the number or name (up to 20  
digits or characters) if necessary, then press the [OK] key.  
• You can change the settings configured during the Initial Setup later in the [Admin. Tools] menu.  
You can also configure the time and date in the [Admin. Tools] menu. For details about [Admin.  
• If the [Print Fax Header] setting under fax transmission settings enabled, the registered user fax  
number, user name, and time and date of transmission appear on the header of every fax you  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Setup  
Changing Operation Modes  
You can switch between copier, scanner, and fax modes by pressing the corresponding keys.  
Press the [Copy], [Scanner], or [Facsimile] key to switch to each mode. While operating in each mode,  
the corresponding key lights up.  
DAC521  
Function Priority  
By default, the machine switches to the copier mode when it is turned on, or if the preset [System  
Auto Reset Timer] time passes with the machine left idle while displaying the initial screen of another  
mode. You can change the mode to switch to in such conditions using [Function Priority] under  
[Admin. Tools].  
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].  
Multi-access  
This machine can perform multiple jobs using different functions, such as copying and faxing, at the  
same time. Performing multiple functions simultaneously is called "Multi-access".  
The following table shows the functions that can be performed simultaneously.  
Current job  
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously  
• Fax memory transmission  
• Fax memory reception  
Copying  
• Internet Fax reception (no printing)  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
• LAN-Fax transmission  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1. Getting Started  
Current job  
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously  
• Fax memory transmission  
• Fax immediate printing  
• Fax memory reception  
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory  
• Internet Fax reception  
Scanning  
*1 *7  
• Printing  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer (except when  
TWAIN scanning)  
• LAN-Fax transmission (except when TWAIN scanning)  
• Fax memory transmission  
• Fax immediate printing  
• Fax memory reception  
Storing a scanned fax file into  
the machine's memory before  
sending it  
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory  
• Internet Fax reception  
• Printing  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
• LAN-Fax transmission  
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory  
Fax immediate transmission  
(scanning an original and  
sending it simultaneously)  
*5  
• Printing  
• Internet Fax reception  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
• Copying  
• Scanning  
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission  
• Internet Fax transmission  
Fax memory transmission  
(sending a fax that has already  
been stored in the machine's  
memory)  
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory  
• Internet Fax reception  
*5  
• Printing  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Setup  
Current job  
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously  
• Fax memory transmission  
• Fax immediate printing  
• Fax memory reception  
Internet Fax transmission  
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory  
*5  
• Printing  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
• LAN-Fax transmission  
*6  
• Scanning  
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission  
• Internet Fax transmission  
Fax immediate printing  
(receiving a fax and printing it  
simultaneously)  
• Internet Fax reception (no printing)  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
• Copying  
• Scanning  
Fax memory reception (storing  
a received fax into the  
machine's memory)  
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission  
• Internet Fax transmission  
• Internet Fax reception (no printing)  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
*6  
• Scanning  
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission  
• Fax immediate transmission  
• Fax memory transmission  
Printing a received fax stored  
in the machine's memory  
• Internet Fax transmission  
• Internet Fax reception (no printing)  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
• LAN-Fax transmission  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
Current job  
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously  
• Scanning  
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission  
• Fax immediate transmission  
Internet Fax reception  
• Fax memory transmission  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
• LAN-Fax transmission  
• Copying  
• Scanning  
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission  
• Fax immediate transmission  
• Fax memory transmission  
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory  
• Fax memory reception  
Internet Fax reception (no  
printing)  
• Printing  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
• LAN-Fax transmission  
*2  
• Scanning  
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission  
*3  
• Fax immediate transmission  
*3  
Printing  
• Fax memory transmission  
• Internet Fax transmission  
• Internet Fax reception (no printing)  
• LAN-Fax transmission  
*4  
• Scanning (except for Scan to USB)  
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission  
• Fax immediate transmission  
• Fax memory transmission  
PictBridge printing  
• Internet Fax transmission  
• Internet Fax reception (no printing)  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
• LAN-Fax transmission  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Setup  
Current job  
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously  
• Copying  
• Scanning (except for TWAIN scanning)  
• Fax immediate printing  
• Fax memory reception  
Receiving a LAN-Fax job from  
a computer  
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory  
• Internet Fax reception  
• PictBridge printing  
• LAN-Fax transmission  
• Copying  
• Scanning (except for TWAIN scanning)  
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission  
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory  
• Internet Fax reception  
LAN-Fax transmission  
• Internet Fax transmission  
• Printing  
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer  
Printing starts after scanning is finished if [Gradation:] is set to [Standard] or [Fine] (PCL printer driver), or  
when printing from the PostScript 3 printer driver.  
*1  
*2  
*3  
Scanning is not possible if [Gradation:] is set to [Standard] or [Fine] (PCL printer driver), or when printing  
from the PostScript 3 printer driver.  
Fax transmission is not possible if [Gradation:] is set to [Fine] (PCL printer driver), or when printing from the  
PostScript 3 printer driver.  
PictBridge printing might fail if the free memory space is low.  
*4  
*5  
Printing may be canceled if [Gradation:] is set to [Standard] or [Fine] (PCL printer driver), or when printing  
from the PostScript 3 printer driver.  
Fax printing may take longer than normal if you scan using the control panel at the same time, especially  
when scanning multiple pages using the exposure glass.  
*6  
*7  
Scan to USB is not available with PictBridge.  
• If you try to use a function that cannot be performed simultaneously, you will hear a beep sound  
from the machine or see a failure message pop up on your computer screen. In this case, try again  
after the current job is finished.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
Assigning a Setting to the [ID Card Copy] Key (Shortcut Function)  
You can access a frequently-used setting with a single keystroke by assigning the setting to the [ID Card  
Copy] key.  
• You can configure settings for the following four function,  
• ID Card Copy Mode (Default)  
• Fax Auto Print Setting  
• Fax Immediate TX  
• Address Book for FAX  
• Select Scanner Dest.  
Assigning a setting using the control panel  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Shortcut to Function], and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the setting you want to configure, and then press the  
[OK] key.  
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].  
Assigning a Setting Using Web Image Monitor  
• This setting appears only when the administrator password is set in the [Administrator] page.  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [System Settings].  
3. Click the [Shortcut to Function] tab.  
4. Specify the setting you want to configure from [Shortcut to Function Settings].  
5. Enter the administrator password.  
6. Click [OK].  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Setup  
7. Close the Web browser.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
Configuring Network Settings  
This section describes configuring the settings required to use the machine on a network.  
Configuring the IP Address Settings  
The procedure for configuring network settings differs depending on whether the IP address is assigned  
automatically by the network (DHCP), is specified manually.  
• The password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].  
• If your network environment requires a specific transmission speed that is not automatically  
detected, specify the transmission speed in [Set Ethernet Speed] under [Network Settings].  
• First configure the IP address setting, then install the driver. For details about installing the driver,  
see the Driver Installation Guide.  
Specifying settings to receive an IPv4 address automatically  
• A DHCP server is required on the network for the machine to receive an IPv4 address  
automatically.  
1. Turn on the machine.  
2. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [IPv4 Configuration], and then press the [OK] key.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring Network Settings  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [DHCP], and then press the [OK] key.  
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Active], and then press the [OK] key.  
8. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
9. If you are requested to restart the machine, turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.  
10. Print the configuration page to check the setting.  
The IPv4 address setting will appear under "TCP/IP" on the configuration page.  
Assigning the machine's IPv4 address manually  
• The IPv4 address assigned to the machine must not be used by any other device on the same  
network.  
1. Turn on the machine.  
2. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [IPv4 Configuration], and then press the [OK] key.  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [DHCP], and then press the [OK] key.  
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Inactive], and then press the [OK] key.  
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [IP Address], and then press the [OK] key.  
The current IPv4 address is shown.  
9. Enter the machine’s IPv4 address using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
Press the [ ] and [ ] keys to move between fields.  
10. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Subnet Mask], and then press the [OK] key.  
The current subnet mask is shown.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Getting Started  
11. Enter the subnet mask using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
Press the [ ] and [ ] keys to move between fields.  
12. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Gateway Address], and then press the [OK] key.  
The current gateway address is shown.  
13. Enter the gateway address using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
Press the [ ] and [ ] keys to move between fields.  
14. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
15. If you are requested to restart the machine, turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.  
16. Print the configuration page to check the setting.  
The IPv4 address setting will appear under "TCP/IP" on the configuration page.  
• If [DHCP] is enabled, manually configured IPv4 address settings are not used.  
Specifying settings to receive an IPv6 address automatically  
• A DHCP server is required on the network for the machine to receive an IPv6 address  
automatically.  
1. Turn on the machine.  
2. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [IPv6 Configuration], and then press the [OK] key.  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [IPv6], and then press the [OK] key.  
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Active], and then press the [OK] key.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Network Settings  
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [DHCP], and then press the [OK] key.  
9. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Active], and then press the [OK] key.  
10. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
11. If you are requested to reboot the machine, turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.  
12. Print the configuration page to confirm the setting.  
The IPv6 address setting will appear under "IPv6 Configuration" on the configuration page.  
Assigning the machine's IPv6 address manually  
• The IPv6 address assigned to the machine must not be used by any other device on the same  
network.  
1. Turn on the machine.  
2. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [IPv6 Configuration], and then press the [OK] key.  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [IPv6], and then press the [OK] key.  
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Active], and then press the [OK] key.  
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [DHCP], and then press the [OK] key.  
9. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Inactive], and then press the [OK] key.  
10. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Manual Config. Address], and then press the [OK] key.  
11. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Manual Config. Address], and then press the [OK] key.  
12. Enter the machine’s IPv6 address using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
13. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Prefix Length], and then press the [OK] key.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Getting Started  
14. Enter the prefix length using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
15. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Gateway Address], and then press the [OK] key.  
16. Enter the gateway address using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
17. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
18. If you are requested to reboot the machine, turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.  
19. Print the configuration page to confirm the setting.  
The IPv6 address setting will appear under "IPv6 Configuration" on the configuration page.  
Sharing the Printer on a Network  
This section explains how to configure this machine as a Windows network printer.  
The network printer setting can be configured to enable network clients to use the machine.  
• To change printer properties, you need access privileges for printer management. Log on using the  
account for the Administrator group members.  
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7. If you are using another operating system, the  
procedure might differ slightly.  
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].  
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8 or Windows Server 2012, click [Search] on  
the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window appears, click  
[View devices and printers].  
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use, and then click [Printer properties].  
The printer properties dialog box appears.  
3. On the [Sharing] tab, click [Share this printer].  
• To share this printer with users using a different version of Windows, continue with this  
procedure.  
• If you have installed an alternative driver by selecting [Share this printer] during the printer  
driver installation, proceed to Step 8.  
4. Click [Additional Drivers...].  
5. Select the version of Windows with which you want to share the printer, and then click  
[OK].  
6. Click [Browse...], select the driver file, and then click [Open].  
7. Click [OK].  
8. On the [Advanced] tab, click the [Printing Defaults...] button.  
Specify the default values for the printer driver to be used by client computers, and then click [OK].  
9. Click [Apply].  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Network Settings  
10. Click [OK].  
Wireless LAN Setup  
This section explains how to configure the wireless LAN settings manually using the control panel. For  
easy setup using WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), see Wi-Fi Settings Guide.  
• If [Inactive] is specified for the [Wi-Fi] setting, you cannot use the [Setup Wizard]. Specify [Active]  
for the [Wi-Fi] setting first. If you change the [Wi-Fi] setting, the machine must be restarted.  
• Ensure that the router, access point, or device equipped with a wireless LAN, etc., is turned on.  
• Check the authentication method and the name of the router, access point, or device equipped  
with a wireless LAN (SSID/IBSS) in advance.  
• First, configure the wireless LAN setting, and then install the driver. For details about installing the  
driver, see the Driver Installation Guide.  
Infrastructure mode  
Use the following procedure to connect to the wireless LAN router or access point manually.  
1. Turn on the machine.  
2. Press the [User Tools] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Wi-Fi Configuration], and then press the [OK] key.  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Setup Wizard], and then press the [OK] key.  
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Infrastructure], and then press [Next].  
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the destination SSID, and then press [Next].  
If you cannot find the destination SSID, check if the device is turned on.  
When entering the SSID, select [Input SSID], and then press [Next].  
The SSID entry screen appears. Enter the SSID using the number keys, and then press [Next].  
9. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the authentication method, and then press [Next].  
Select the same method that the router or access point is using.  
If you have selected [WPA2-PSK] or [Mix Mode WPA2/WPA], proceed to Step 11.  
10. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the encryption method, and then press [Next].  
Select the same method that the router or access point is using.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Getting Started  
11. Enter the encryption key using the number keys, and then press [Connect].  
If you selected [Shared Key] or [Open System] in Step 9, it is necessary to enter the ID. The ID is  
used for identifying the encryption key. You can register four encryption keys (ID 1 to 4). Use the  
[ ] or [ ] key to switch between the encryption key and ID settings.  
12. Press [Yes].  
After connecting to the network, the Wi-Fi screen is displayed.  
13. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Wi-Fi Status], and then press the [OK] key.  
When "Connected" is displayed, the connection has been established.  
When "Disconnected" is displayed, the connection has not been established. Start again from the  
beginning.  
Ad Hoc mode  
This section explains how to connect directly to devices equipped with a wireless LAN, such as  
computers on a peer-to-peer network.  
• In Ad Hoc network, every device must be manually assigned an IP address for TCP/IP if there is no  
DHCP server.  
• In Ad Hoc mode, only Open System or WEP encryption is supported. WPA2-PSK and Mix Mode  
WPA2/WPA authentication methods are not supported.  
1. Turn on the machine.  
2. Press the [User Tools] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Wi-Fi Configuration], and then press the [OK] key.  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Setup Wizard], and then press the [OK] key.  
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Ad-Hoc], and then press [Next].  
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select a communication channel, and then press [Next].  
Select a channel that corresponds to the device that you are going to connect with.  
9. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the destination device name (IBSS), and then press  
[Next].  
If you cannot find the destination, check that the device is turned on.  
When entering the device name, select [Input SSID], and then press [Next]. The SSID entry screen  
appears. Enter the device name using the number keys, and then press [Next].  
10. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the authentication method, and then press [Next].  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Network Settings  
11. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the encryption method, and then press [Next].  
12. Enter the encryption key and ID using the number keys, and then press [Connect].  
The ID is used for identifying the encryption key. You can register four encryption keys (ID 1 to 4).  
13. Press [Yes].  
After connecting to the network, the Wi-Fi screen is displayed.  
14. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Wi-Fi Status], and then press the [OK] key.  
When "Connected" is displayed, the connection has been established.  
When "Disconnected" is displayed, the connection has not been established. Start again from the  
beginning.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
Restricting Machine Functions According to  
User  
You can configure settings to require a user code when someone tries to use certain machine functions.  
To enable this setting, you must first configure the machine settings via Web Image Monitor.  
• This function is available for the Type 2 model only.  
• To print jobs that require authentication you can use only the PCL printer driver. Printing such jobs  
from the PostScript 3 printer driver is not possible.  
Enabling the User Restriction Settings  
This section explains how to configure settings to permit only authorized users to use certain machine  
functions.  
Using Web Image Monitor, enable user restriction for all or some of the functions listed below, and then  
register users who can use those functions.  
• Copying (both color and black-and-white)  
• Color copying  
• Sending faxes  
• Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder  
• Scan to USB  
• PictBridge printing  
• Printing (both color and black-and-white)  
• Color printing  
• Sending faxes via LAN-Fax  
You can specify functions available to each user upon authentication. Up to 30 users can be registered.  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [Restrict Available Functions].  
3. Enter the administrator password if required.  
4. Click [Apply].  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Restricting Machine Functions According to User  
5. Under "Available Functions", select [Restrict] for the functions you want to restrict, and  
then click [Apply].  
Select [Do not Restrict] for the functions you do not want to restrict.  
The user restriction setting is enabled for the selected function. Proceed to the following steps to  
register users.  
6. Click [Available Functions per User].  
A list of currently registered user entries appears.  
7. Select a user entry, and then click [Change].  
The following window appears.  
8. Enter the user name in [User Name] using up to 16 alphanumeric characters.  
9. Enter the user code in [User Code] using up to 8 digits.  
The user code will be used to authenticate users when they try to use a restricted function.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
10. Select the functions you want to make available to the user upon authentication.  
Unselected functions will be unavailable to users authenticated under this user code.  
11. Click [Apply].  
12. Close the Web browser.  
• You must enter both the user name and user code to register a user entry.  
• Make sure that different user entries do not share the same user name or user code.  
Modifying user entries  
This section explains how to modify user entries.  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [Restrict Available Functions].  
3. Enter the administrator password if required.  
4. Click [Apply].  
5. Click [Available Functions per User].  
A list of currently registered user entries appears.  
6. Select the entry to modify, and then click [Change].  
7. Modify settings as necessary.  
8. Click [Apply].  
9. Close the Web browser.  
Deleting user entries  
This section explains how to delete user entries.  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [Restrict Available Functions].  
3. Enter the administrator password if required.  
4. Click [Apply].  
5. Click [Available Functions per User].  
A list of currently registered user entries appears.  
6. Select the entry to delete, and then click [Delete].  
7. Confirm that the entry you have selected is the entry that you want to delete.  
8. Click [Apply].  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restricting Machine Functions According to User  
9. Close the Web browser.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
When Machine Functions are Restricted  
Restricted functions can be used only by authorized users.  
Depending on the restricted function, users will be authenticated from the machine's control panel or in  
the printer/LAN-Fax driver.  
• This function is available for the Type 2 model only.  
• To print jobs that require authentication you can use only the PCL printer driver. Printing such jobs  
from the PostScript 3 printer driver is not possible.  
• The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 7.  
The table below shows the functions that can be restricted, and how users can be authenticated to use  
them.  
Restricted Function  
Authentication method  
• Copying (both color and  
black-and-white)  
The machine requests for a user code when a user presses the  
[B&W Start] or [Color Start] key.  
• Color copying  
The user must enter a valid user code from the control panel.  
• Sending faxes  
• Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder  
• Scan to USB  
• PictBridge printing  
The machine requests for a user code when a digital camera is  
connected to the machine.  
The user must enter a valid user code from the control panel.  
• Printing (both color and  
black-and-white)  
The user must enter a valid user code in the printer or LAN-Fax  
driver before executing a print command.  
• Color printing  
• Sending faxes via LAN-Fax  
Authentication using the control panel  
1. If the machine requests for the user code, enter a user code using the number keys.  
If you enter a wrong user code 3 times, the machine beeps and denies further attempts of  
authentication.  
2. Press the [OK] key.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When Machine Functions are Restricted  
Authentication using the printer or LAN-Fax driver  
1. Open the file you want to print on your computer.  
2. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].  
3. In the [Select Printer] area, select the name of this machine, and then click [Preferences].  
4. Click the [Valid Access] tab (PCL printer driver) or check the [User Code] check box. (LAN-  
Fax driver).  
5. Enter the user code using 1 to 8 digits, and then click [OK].  
6. Execute a print command.  
If an incorrect user code is entered, the job will be canceled automatically (without any error  
message).  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Loading Paper  
Supported Paper  
Tray 1  
Type  
Size  
Weight  
Capacity  
2
Thin paper  
A4  
60 to 160 g/m  
(16 to 43 lb.)  
250  
2
Plain paper  
B5 JIS  
A5  
(80 g/m , 20 lb.)  
Middle thick paper  
Thick paper 1, 2  
Recycled paper  
Color paper  
B6 JIS  
A6  
1
Legal (8 / × 14 inches)  
2
1
Preprinted paper  
Prepunched paper  
Letterhead  
Letter (8 / × 11 inches)  
2
1
1
Half Letter (5 / × 8 / inches)  
2
2
1
1
Executive (7 / × 10 /  
4
2
inches)  
Bond paper  
8 × 13 inches  
Cardstock  
1
8 / × 13 inches  
2
Label paper  
1
Folio (8 / × 13 inches)  
4
Envelope  
16K (195 × 267 mm)  
1
1
Com 10 (4 / × 9 / inches)  
8
2
7
1
Monarch (3 / × 7 / inches)  
8
2
C5 Env (162 × 229 mm)  
C6 Env (114 × 162 mm)  
DL Env (110 × 220 mm)  
Custom size:  
90 to 216 mm in width,  
148 to 356 mm in length  
(3.54 to 8.50 inches in width,  
5.83 to 14.0 inches in length)  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Loading Paper  
Tray 2 (option)  
Type  
Size  
Weight  
Capacity  
2
Thin paper  
A4  
Letter (8 / × 11 inches)  
60 to 105 g/m  
(16 to 28 lb.)  
500  
1
2
Plain paper  
(80 g/m , 20 lb.)  
2
Middle thick paper  
Thick paper 1  
Recycled paper  
Color paper  
Preprinted paper  
Prepunched paper  
Letterhead  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supported Paper  
Bypass tray  
Type  
Size  
Weight  
Capacity  
2
Thin paper  
A4  
60 to 160 g/m  
(16 to 43 lb.)  
1
Plain paper  
B5 JIS  
A5  
Middle thick paper  
Thick paper 1, 2  
Recycled paper  
Color paper  
Prepunched paper  
Letterhead  
B6 JIS  
A6  
1
Legal (8 / × 14 inches)  
2
1
Letter (8 / × 11 inches)  
2
1
1
Half Letter (5 / × 8 / inches)  
2
2
1
1
Bond paper  
Executive (7 / × 10 /  
4
2
inches)  
Cardstock  
8 × 13  
Label paper  
Envelope  
1
8 / × 13  
2
1
Folio (8 / × 13 inches )  
4
16K (195 mm × 267 mm)  
1
1
Com 10 (4 / × 9 / inches)  
8
2
7
1
Monarch (3 / × 7 / inches)  
8
2
C5 Env (162 × 229 mm)  
C6 Env (114 × 162 mm)  
DL Env (110 × 220 mm)  
Custom size:  
90 to 216 mm in width,  
148 to 356 mm in length  
(3.54 to 8.50 inches in width,  
5.83 to 14.0 inches in length)  
• You cannot print on Legal size paper in the following cases:  
• PCL printer driver  
When [Gradation:] in [Print Quality] is set to [Fine]  
• PostScript 3 printer driver  
When [Print Quality] in [Printer Features] is set to [Best Quality]  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Loading Paper  
Specifications of Paper Types  
The following tables describe the types of paper that can be used with this machine.  
• Depending on the paper type, the toner may take a while to dry. Before handling printed sheets,  
make sure that they have fully dried. Otherwise, the toner may smudge.  
• Print quality can be guaranteed only if recommended paper is used. For more information about  
the recommended paper, contact your sales or service representative.  
Middle thick paper  
Item  
Description  
2
Paper thickness  
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Can be used with any of the paper trays.  
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, B5 JIS, Legal (8 / × 14 inches), Letter (8 / × 11 inches), Executive  
2
2
1
1
1
1
(7 / × 10 / inches ), 8 × 13, 8 / × 13, Folio (8 / × 13 inches), 16K  
4
2
2
4
(195 mm × 267 mm)  
Thick paper 1  
Item  
Description  
2
Paper thickness  
91 to 105 g/m (24 to 28 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Can be used with any of the paper trays.  
Duplex supported size None  
Notes  
The number of sheets that can be printed per minute is approximately half  
that of middle thick paper.  
Thick paper 2  
Item  
Description  
2
Paper thickness  
106 to 160 g/m (28 to 43 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Tray 1 and bypass tray  
Duplex supported size None  
Notes The number of sheets that can be printed per minute is approximately half  
that of middle thick paper.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Supported Paper  
Thin paper  
Item  
Description  
Paper thickness  
60 to 65g/m2 (16 to 17 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Can be used with any of the paper trays.  
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, B5 JIS, Legal (8 / × 14 inches), Letter (8 / × 11 inches), Executive  
2
2
1
1
1
1
(7 / × 10 / inches), 8 × 13, 8 / × 13, Folio (8 / × 13 inches), 16K  
4
2
2
4
(195 mm × 267 mm)  
Plain paper  
Item  
Description  
Paper thickness  
66 to 74 g/m2 (18 to 20 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Can be used with any of the paper trays.  
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, B5 JIS, Legal (8 / × 14 inches), Letter (8 / × 11 inches), Executive  
2
2
1
1
1
1
(7 / × 10 / inches), 8 × 13, 8 / × 13, Folio (8 / × 13 inches), 16K  
4
2
2
4
(195 mm × 267 mm)  
Recycled paper  
Item  
Description  
2
Paper thickness  
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Can be used with any of the paper trays.  
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, B5 JIS, Legal (8 / × 14 inches), Letter (8 / × 11 inches), Executive  
2
2
1
1
1
1
(7 / × 10 / inches), 8 × 13, 8 / × 13, Folio (8 / × 13 inches), 16K  
4
2
2
4
(195 mm × 267 mm)  
Notes  
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],  
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].  
Color paper  
Item  
Description  
2
Paper thickness  
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Can be used with any of the paper trays.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Loading Paper  
Item  
Description  
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, B5 JIS, Legal (8 / × 14 inches), Letter (8 / × 11 inches), Executive  
2
2
1
1
1
1
(7 / × 10 / inches), 8 × 13, 8 / × 13, Folio (8 / × 13 inches), 16K  
4
2
2
4
(195 mm × 267 mm)  
Notes  
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],  
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].  
Preprinted paper  
Item  
Description  
2
Paper thickness  
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Tray 1 and tray 2  
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, B5 JIS, Legal (8 / × 14 inches), Letter (8 / × 11 inches), Executive  
2
2
1
1
1
1
(7 / × 10 / inches), 8 × 13, 8 / × 13 inches, Folio (8 / × 13  
4
2
2
4
inches), 16K (195 mm × 267 mm)  
Notes  
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],  
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].  
Prepunched paper  
Item  
Description  
2
Paper thickness  
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Can be used with any of the paper trays.  
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, B5 JIS, Legal (8 / × 14 inches), Letter (8 / × 11 inches), Executive  
2
2
1
1
1
1
(7 / × 10 / inches), 8 × 13, 8 / × 13, Folio (8 / × 13 inches), 16K  
4
2
2
4
(195 mm × 267 mm)  
Notes  
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],  
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].  
Letterhead  
Item  
Description  
2
Paper thickness  
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Can be used with any of the paper trays.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supported Paper  
Item  
Description  
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, B5 JIS, Legal (8 / × 14 inches), Letter (8 / × 11 inches), Executive  
2
2
1
1
1
1
(7 / × 10 / inches), 8 × 13, 8 / × 13, Folio (8 / × 13 inches), 16K  
4
2
2
4
(195 mm × 267 mm)  
Notes  
Paper that has a thickness outside the specified range cannot be printed  
onto.  
Bond paper  
Item  
Description  
2
Paper thickness  
106 to 160 g/m (28 to 43 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Tray 1 and bypass tray  
Duplex supported size None  
Notes  
• The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is  
approximately half that of middle thick paper.  
• If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thick Paper  
1].  
Cardstock  
Item  
Description  
2
Paper thickness  
106 to 160 g/m (28 to 43 lb.)  
Supported paper tray  
Tray 1 and bypass tray  
Duplex supported size None  
Notes  
• The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is  
approximately half that of middle thick paper.  
2
• Paper thicker than 160 g/m cannot be printed onto.  
Label paper  
Item  
Supported paper tray  
Description  
Tray 1 and bypass tray  
Duplex supported size None  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Loading Paper  
Item  
Description  
Notes  
• The number of sheets that can be printed per minute is approximately  
half that of middle thick paper.  
• Avoid using adhesive label paper on which glue is exposed. Glue  
may stick to the inner parts of the machine, which can cause paper  
feed problems, deterioration in print quality, or premature wear of the  
print cartridge's photo conductor unit.  
Envelope  
Item  
Supported paper tray  
Description  
Tray 1 and bypass tray  
Duplex supported size None  
Notes  
• Avoid using self-adhesive envelopes. They may cause machine malfunctions.  
• The number of envelopes that can be printed per minute is approximately half that of middle thick  
paper.  
• Paper can be loaded only up to the lower of the two paper limit marks of the tray.  
• If printed envelopes come out badly creased, load the envelopes in the opposite direction. Also,  
configure the printer driver to rotate the print object 180 degrees. For details about changing the  
orientation see the printer driver Help.  
• Environmental factors can degrade the print quality on both recommended and non-recommended  
envelopes.  
• If envelopes are severely curled after printing, flatten them by bending them back against the curl.  
• After printing, envelopes sometimes have creases along their long edges and toner smear on their  
unprinted sides. Print images might also be blurred. When printing large, black-solid areas, striping  
can occur as a result of the envelopes overlapping.  
• To correctly specify the length of an envelope whose flap opens along its short edge, be sure to  
include the open flap when measuring.  
CER112  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supported Paper  
• Fan envelopes, and then align their edges before loading.  
DAC573  
• When fanning envelopes, make sure they are not stuck together. If they are stuck together,  
separate them.  
• When fanning envelopes, make sure the envelope flaps are not stuck. If they are stuck, separate  
them.  
• Before loading envelopes, flatten them out so that their curl does not exceed that shown as shown  
below.  
DAC574  
• If the curl is severe, flatten out the envelopes using your fingers, as shown below.  
DAC575  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Loading Paper  
1
1
• You may not be able to perform duplex printing on 8 × 13, 8 / × 13, Folio (8 / × 13 inches),  
2
4
or 16K (195 mm × 267 mm) size paper in the following cases:  
• PCL printer driver  
When [Gradation:] in [Print Quality] is set to [Fine]  
• PostScript 3 printer driver  
When [Print Quality] in [Printer Features] is set to [Best Quality]  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Non-Recommended Paper Types  
Non-Recommended Paper Types  
Do not use the following types of paper:  
• Ink-jet printer paper  
• Bent, folded, or creased paper  
• Curled or twisted paper  
• Torn paper  
• Wrinkled paper  
• Damp paper  
• Dirty or damaged paper  
• Paper that is dry enough to emit static electricity  
• Paper that has already been printed onto, except a preprinted letterhead paper.  
Malfunctions are especially likely when using paper printed on by other than a laser printer  
(e.g.monochrome and color copiers, ink-jet printers, etc.)  
• Special paper, such as thermal paper and carbon paper  
• Paper weighing heavier or lighter than the limit  
• Paper with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing  
• Adhesive label paper on which glue or base paper is exposed  
• Paper with clips or staples  
• When loading paper, take care not to touch the surface of the paper.  
• Even if paper is adequate for the machine, poorly stored paper can cause paper misfeeds, print  
quality degradation, or malfunctions.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Loading Paper  
Print Area  
The diagram below shows the area of the paper that the machine can print on.  
Paper  
2
4
4
3
1
3
DAC571  
1. Print area  
2. Feed direction  
3. Approx. 4.2 mm (0.2 inches)  
4. Approx. 4.2 mm (0.2 inches)  
Envelope  
4
3
3
1
2
3
DAC577  
1. Print area  
2. Feed direction  
3. Approximately 10 mm (0.4 inches)  
4. Approximately 15 mm (0.6 inches)  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Print Area  
• Borderless printing is not supported.  
• The print area may vary depending on the paper size, printer language and printer driver  
settings.  
• For better envelope printing, we recommend you set the right, left, top, and bottom print  
margins to at least 15 mm (0.6 inches) each.  
Copier function  
4
4
3
1
3
2
DAC580  
1. Print area  
2. Feed direction  
3. Approx. 4 mm (0.2 inches)  
4. Approx. 3 mm (0.1 inches)  
• The print area may vary depending on the paper size.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Loading Paper  
Fax function  
4
4
3
1
3
2
DAC580  
1. Print area  
2. Feed direction  
3. Approx. 4.2 mm (0.2 inches)  
4. Approx. 2 mm (0.08 inches)  
• The print area may vary depending on the paper size.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
Loading Paper  
Loading Paper into Tray1 and 2  
The following example explains the loading procedure for the standard paper tray (Tray 1).  
The same procedure applies to loading paper in Tray 2.  
• Before printing on paper other than envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers on the machine rear,  
inside the rear cover.  
• Curled paper may jam. Straighten curled paper before loading.  
• After loading paper in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel to avoid  
printing problems. This machine does not detect the paper size automatically.  
1. Pull out the paper tray carefully with both hands.  
DAC070  
Place the tray on a flat surface.  
2. Push the metal plate down until it clicks.  
DAC050  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Loading Paper  
3. Pinch the clip on the side paper guide and slide it to match the paper size.  
DAC051  
When loading custom size paper, position the paper guide slightly wider than the actual paper  
size.  
4. Pinch the end paper guide and slide it inward to match the paper size.  
DAC053  
When loading custom size paper, position the paper guide slightly wider than the actual paper  
size.  
5. Load new sheets of paper aligned with their side to be printed face down.  
Make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit marked inside the tray.  
The upper limit mark in Tray 2 differs from the illustrated mark.  
DAC052  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
Slide the guides inward until they are flush against the paper's sides.  
Make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the projection on the side paper guides.  
When using Tray 2, make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit marked inside  
the tray.  
DAC059  
6. Check there are no gaps between the paper and the paper guides (both side and end  
paper guides).  
DAC058  
7. Carefully push the paper tray straight into the machine.  
To avoid paper jams, make sure the tray is securely inserted.  
• The upper limit differs depending on the paper type (thin or thick paper). See the label inside the  
tray to check the upper limit.  
• The remaining paper indicator on the right front side of the paper tray shows approximately how  
much paper is remaining.  
Extending Tray 1 to load paper  
This section explains how to load paper longer than A4 (297 mm) into the machine.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Loading Paper  
1. Remove the rear cover using a coin.  
DAC032  
2. Pull out Tray 1 carefully with both hands.  
Place the tray on a flat surface.  
3. Push the metal plate down until it clicks.  
DAC050  
4. Pinch the extender in the "PUSH" direction, and then pull out the extender until it clicks.  
DAC055  
After extension, check that the arrows on the extender and tray are aligned.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
DAC056  
5. Follow Steps 3 to 7 in "Loading Paper into Tray1 and 2".  
• To reinsert the extender, you might have to push it with moderate force.  
Loading Paper into Bypass Tray  
• Before printing on paper other than envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers on the machine rear,  
inside the rear cover.  
• Load paper with the print side down and in the short-edge feed direction.  
• Do not load paper while the machine is printing.  
• Curled paper may jam. Straighten curled paper before loading.  
• Duplex printing is not possible.  
• Tray 1 and 2 are unavailable if paper is loaded in the bypass tray.  
• You cannot load paper into the bypass tray while the machine is in Energy Saver mode.  
1. Insert the top edge of the paper into the machine.  
DAC067  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Loading Paper  
2. Adjust the paper guides to the paper size.  
DAC066  
3. Support the paper with both hands, and insert it carefully until it stops.  
DAC065  
Loading Envelopes  
• Before printing on envelopes, make sure to lower the levers on the machine rear, inside the rear  
cover, to avoid envelopes coming out creased. Also, pull up the levers back to their original  
positions after printing.  
• Avoid using self-adhesive envelopes. They may cause machine malfunctions.  
• Check there is no air in the envelopes before loading.  
• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.  
• Before loading envelopes, flatten their leading edges (the edge going into the machine) by running  
a pencil or ruler across them.  
• Some kinds of envelope might cause misfeeds, wrinkles or print poorly.  
• Print quality on envelopes may be uneven if parts of an envelope have different thicknesses. Print  
one or two envelopes in advance to check the print quality.  
• In a hot and humid environment, the envelope might be delivered creased or with low printing  
quality.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Paper  
Lowering the fusing unit levers  
1. Pull the front cover open lever, and then carefully lower the front cover.  
2
1
DAC061  
2. Lower the fusing unit levers.  
DAC340  
3. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.  
DAC062  
• Be sure to load envelopes so that their flaps are on the right. If you do not, the envelopes will  
become creased.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Loading Paper  
• If printed envelopes come out badly creased, load the envelopes in the opposite direction, and  
then rotate the print object by 180 degrees using the printer driver before printing. For details, see  
the printer driver Help.  
• When Using Tray 1  
• If the envelope flap is on a short side, place the envelope with the flap side in the tray recess.  
If the envelope flap is on a long side, place the envelope with the flap side on the right.  
DAC576  
• When Using the Bypass Tray  
• If the envelope flap is on a short side, place the envelope with the flap side in the front part of  
the tray. If the envelope flap is on a long side, place the envelope with the flap side on the  
right.  
DAC473  
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using Control Panel  
This section explains how to specify the paper size and paper type using the control panel.  
• Paper type and size can also be specified using the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver  
Help.  
• For prints from the bypass tray or Tray 1, you can select to print according to either the printer  
driver settings or the control panel settings with [Bypass Tray Priority] or [Tray1 Priority] under tray  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Paper  
• If [Auto Continue] under system settings is enabled, printing stops temporarily if a paper type/size  
error is detected. The printing restarts automatically with the settings made with the control panel  
after about ten seconds. However, if the size of paper specified on the control panel and that of the  
paper loaded in the paper tray or the paper size specified for the print job do not match when  
Specifying the paper type  
This section explains how to specify the paper type.  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Tray Paper Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the paper type setting for the desired tray, and then  
press the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired paper type, and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
Specifying the standard paper size  
This section explains how to specify the standard paper size.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Loading Paper  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Tray Paper Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the paper size setting for the desired tray, and then press  
the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ], [ ],[ ], or [ ] key to select the desired paper size, and then press the [OK]  
key.  
5. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
Specifying a custom paper size  
This section explains how to specify a custom paper size.  
• When you perform printing, make sure that the paper size specified with the printer driver matches  
the paper size specified with the control panel. If a paper size mismatch occurs, a message  
• Custom size paper cannot be loaded in Tray 2.  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Tray Paper Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the paper size setting for the desired tray, and then press  
the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] key to select [Custom Size], and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [mm] or [inch], and then press the [OK] key.  
6. Enter the width using number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
To enter a decimal point, press the [ ] key.  
7. Enter the length using number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
To enter a decimal point, press the [ ] key.  
8. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Loading Paper  
Placing Originals  
This section describes the types of originals you can use and how to place them.  
About Originals  
This section describes the types of originals that can be placed and the parts of the original that are  
chipped in the scanned copy.  
Recommended size of originals  
This section describes the recommended size of the original.  
Exposure glass  
Up to 216 mm (8.5 inches) in width, up to 297 mm (11.7 inches) in length  
ADF  
1
1
1
• Paper size: 140 to 216 mm (5 / to 8 / inches) in width, 140 to 356 mm (5 / to 14  
2
2
2
inches) in length  
2
• Paper weight: 52 to 105 g/m (13.8 to 28.0 lb.)  
• Only 1 sheet of original can be placed on the exposure glass at a time.  
• In the ADF, up to 35 sheets of originals can be placed at once (when using paper weighing 80  
2
g/m , 20 lb.).  
Types of originals not supported by the Auto Document Feeder  
If placed in the ADF, the following types of original might be damaged or become jammed, or result in  
gray or black lines appearing on prints:  
• Originals larger or heavier than recommended  
• Stapled or clipped originals  
• Perforated or torn originals  
• Curled, folded, or creased originals  
• Pasted originals  
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon  
paper, or conductive paper  
• Originals with perforated lines  
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Placing Originals  
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper  
• Thin, highly flexible originals  
• Thick originals such as postcards  
• Bound originals such as books  
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper  
• Originals that are wet with toner or correction fluid  
Unscannable image area  
Even if you correctly place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass, margins of a few millimeters on  
all four sides of the original might be chipped.  
DAC579  
Margins when using exposure glass  
In copier mode  
4 mm (0.2 inches)  
3 mm (0.1 inches)  
3 mm (0.1 inches)  
4 mm (0.2 inches)  
In scanner mode  
0 mm (0 inches)  
0 mm (0 inches)  
0 mm (0 inches)  
0 mm (0 inches)  
In fax mode  
1 mm (0.05 inches)  
1 mm (0.05 inches)  
1 mm (0.05 inches)  
2 mm (0.08 inches)  
Top  
Right  
Left  
Bottom  
Margins when using ADF  
In copier mode  
In scanner mode  
0 mm (0 inches)  
In fax mode  
Top  
4 mm (0.2 inches)  
0 mm (0 inches)  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Loading Paper  
In copier mode  
In scanner mode  
0 mm (0 inches)  
In fax mode  
Right  
Left  
3 mm (0.1 inches)  
1 mm (0.05 inches)  
(Letter, Legal)  
0 mm (0 inches) (other  
sizes)  
3 mm (0.1 inches)  
4 mm (0.2 inches)  
0 mm (0 inches)  
1 mm (0.05 inches)  
(Letter, Legal)  
0 mm (0 inches) (other  
sizes)  
Bottom  
2 mm (0.08 inches)  
2 mm (0.08 inches)  
Placing Originals  
This section describes the procedure for placing originals on the exposure glass and in the ADF.  
• Do not place originals before any correction fluid and toner has completely dried. Doing so may  
make marks on the exposure glass that will appear on copies.  
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place  
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.  
Placing Originals on the exposure glass  
1. Lift the ADF.  
Be careful not to hold the ADF input paper tray when lifting the ADF. Doing so may damage the  
tray.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Placing Originals  
2. Place the original face down on the exposure glass. Align the original to the rear left  
corner.  
DAC006  
3. Lower the ADF.  
Hold down the ADF with your hands when using thick, folded, or bound originals and the ADF  
cannot be lowered completely.  
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder  
By using the ADF, you can scan multiple pages at once.  
• Do not place different size originals in the ADF at once.  
• Straighten curled originals before placing them in the ADF.  
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the originals before placing them in the ADF.  
• Make sure that the originals are not placed obliquely.  
1. Open the cover of the input tray for the ADF and adjust the guides according to the size of  
the original.  
DAC538  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Loading Paper  
2. Place the aligned originals face up in the ADF. The last page should be on the bottom.  
DAC019  
• When placing originals longer than A4/Letter, pull out the ADF tray's extenders.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Printing Documents  
Basic Operation  
This section explains the basic printing procedure.  
1. Open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box in your document's application.  
For details about each setting, click [Help]. You can also click the information icons to display  
configuration information.  
2. Configure printing option settings as necessary, and then click [OK].  
The printer properties dialog box closes.  
3. Click [OK].  
• If a paper jam occurs, printing stops after the current page has been printed out. After the jammed  
paper is removed, printing restarts from the jammed page automatically. For details about how to  
• After printing on envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers for printing on envelopes back to their  
Canceling a Print Job  
You can cancel print jobs using either the machine's control panel or your computer, depending on the  
status of the job.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. Printing Documents  
Canceling a print job before printing has started  
Windows  
1. Double-click the printer icon on the task tray of your computer.  
2. Select the print job you want to cancel, click the [Document] menu, and then click  
[Cancel].  
Mac OS X  
1. From the Apple menu, select [System Preferences...].  
2. Under "Hardware", click [Print & Fax] or [Print & Scan].  
3. Double-click the machine from "Printers".  
4. Select the print job you want to cancel, and then click [Delete].  
• If you cancel a print job that has already been processed, printing may continue for a few pages  
before being canceled.  
• It may take a while to cancel a large print job.  
Canceling a print job while printing  
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.  
DAC517  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If a Paper Mismatch Occurs  
If a Paper Mismatch Occurs  
The machine reports an error if:  
• The paper size or type does not match the print job's settings when [Input Tray:] is set to [Auto Tray  
Select].  
There are two ways to resolve these errors:  
Continue printing using mismatched paper  
Use the form-feed function to ignore the error and print using mismatched paper.  
Reset the print job  
Cancel printing.  
Continuing Printing Using Mismatched Paper  
If the paper is too small for the print job, the printed image will be cropped.  
1. Press [FormFeed] while the error message is being displayed.  
Resetting the Print Job  
1. When the error message is displayed, press [JobReset].  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Printing Documents  
Printing Confidential Documents  
By the Locked Print function, you can password-protect print jobs.  
This means that your job is printed only after you enter the password using the machine's control panel.  
This function prevents unauthorized users from seeing sensitive documents at the machine.  
• This function is available for the Type 2 model only.  
• This function is only available when using the PCL printer driver, and printing from a computer  
running a Windows operating system.  
• The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 7.  
Storing a Locked Print file  
This section explains how to store a Locked Print file in the machine using the printer driver.  
1. Open the file you want to print on your computer.  
2. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].  
3. In the [Select Printer] area, select the name of this machine, and then click [Preferences].  
4. Click the [Setup] tab, and then select [Locked Print].  
The [Password:] and [User ID:] text boxes become available.  
The [User ID:] text box contains the login user name of your computer account or the user code  
used for the previous Locked Print job.  
5. Type the password (containing 4 to 8 digits) and user ID (containing 1 to 9 alphanumeric  
characters), and then click [OK].  
The user code will be used to identify your Locked Print file on the machine's control panel.  
6. Execute a print command.  
The print job is stored in the machine as a Locked Print file. You can print the file by entering the  
password using the control panel.  
• The Locked Print file is automatically erased from the machine's memory when it is printed out, or  
when the machine's power is turned off.  
• The machine can store up to 5 jobs or 5 MB of Locked Print data at a time.  
• Even if the machine cannot store any more Locked Print files, the machine holds a new Locked Print  
file for the period of time specified in [Locked Print] under system settings before canceling the job.  
Within this time, you can print or delete the new Locked Print file. You can also print or delete an  
existing Locked Print file so that the new Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing Confidential Documents  
• When a Locked Print job is canceled, the machine automatically logs the cancellation. You can use  
this log to identify which Locked Print jobs have been canceled.  
Printing a Locked Print file  
When there is a Locked Print file stored in the machine, “Locked Print Job Press User Tools key” appears  
on the machine's control panel display when the machine is in the copier mode.  
Press User Tools key  
1
A4  
Mixed  
1
[
]
100  
Use the following procedure to unlock and print the Locked Print file.  
1. When the Locked Print message is displayed, press the [User Tools] key.  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the file you want to print, and then press the [OK] key.  
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.  
3. Press [Print].  
4. Enter the password using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
The Locked Print file is printed.  
• To enter the menu for changing the machine's settings, press the [Scanner] or [Facsimile] key, and  
then press the [User Tools] key. To print a Locked Print file, press the [Copy] key to return to the  
copier mode.  
• You cannot print a Locked Print file while the machine is currently printing. The machine beeps if  
you try to do so.  
• While entering a password using the control panel, the machine cannot process other print jobs.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Printing Documents  
• The Locked Print file is automatically erased from the machine's memory when it is printed out, or  
when the machine's power is turned off.  
Deleting a Locked Print file  
If there is a Locked Print file stored in the machine, “Locked Print Job Press User Tools key” appears on  
the machine's control panel display when the machine is in the copier mode.  
Press User Tools key  
1
A4  
Mixed  
1
[
]
100  
Use the following procedure to delete a Locked Print file. You do not need to enter a password to delete  
a Locked Print file.  
1. When the Locked Print message is displayed, press the [User Tools] key.  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the file you want to delete, and then press the [OK] key.  
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.  
3. Press [Delete].  
The Locked Print file is deleted.  
If there are Locked Print files/logs remaining in the machine, the display returns to the list of Locked  
Print files/logs. If there are none remaining, the display returns to the initial screen.  
• To enter the menu for changing the machine's settings, press the [Scanner] key or the [Facsimile]  
key, and then press the [User Tools] key. To delete a Locked Print file, press the [Copy] key to  
return to the copier mode.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing Confidential Documents  
Checking which Locked Print File Jobs Have Been Canceled  
When a Locked Print job is canceled, the machine automatically logs the cancellation. If the machine  
has created a cancellation log, “Locked Print Job Deleted Press User Tools key” will appear on the  
control panel display when the machine is in the copier mode.  
Press User Tools key  
1
A4  
Mixed  
1
[
]
100  
Use the following procedure to check which Locked Print file jobs have been canceled.  
1. When the Locked Print message is displayed, press the [User Tools] key.  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to find a file whose name starts with an "!" mark.  
The "!" mark indicates that the job has been canceled.  
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.  
To delete the log entry, proceed to the following steps.  
3. Press the [OK] key.  
4. Press [Delete].  
The log is deleted.  
If there are Locked Print logs/files remaining in the machine, the display returns to the list of Locked  
Print logs/files. If there are none remaining, the display returns to the initial screen.  
• To enter the menu for changing the machine's settings, press the [Scanner] key or the [Facsimile]  
key, and then press the [User Tools] key. To check the Locked Print log, press the [Copy] key to  
return to the copier mode.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Printing Documents  
• The machine keeps a log of the 10 most recent canceled jobs. If a Locked Print file is canceled  
when the machine's log is already full, the oldest log will be deleted automatically.  
• The message “Locked Print Job Deleted Press User Tools key” disappears when all log entries are  
cleared.  
• The log will be cleared when the machine is turned off.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)  
Direct Printing from a Digital Camera  
(PictBridge)  
What Is PictBridge?  
You can connect a PictBridge-compatible digital camera to this machine using a USB cable. This allows  
you to directly print photographs by operating the digital camera.  
• Check that your digital camera is PictBridge-compatible.  
• Up to 999 images can be sent from the digital camera to the machine during one print transaction.  
If an attempt is made to send more images, an error message is sent to the camera and printing  
fails.  
• Since printing conditions are specified on the digital camera, specifiable parameters depend on  
the digital camera. For details, see the manuals provided with the digital camera.  
• This function is compatible with USB 2.0.  
PictBridge Printing  
Use the following procedure to start PictBridge printing on this machine.  
• Memory overflow errors can occur during printing a high-resolution image. If this happens, reduce  
the size of the data, and then try the operation again.  
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while data is being sent. If you do, printing will fail.  
1. Make sure that both the machine and the digital camera are turned on.  
2. Open the cover of the USB flash disk port, connect the USB cable, and then connect the  
other end of the cable to your digital camera.  
1
2
DAC030  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Printing Documents  
When the machine recognizes the digital camera as a PictBridge device, "PictBridge  
Connecting...", then "Ready" will appear on the machine’s control panel.  
3. On your digital camera, select the images you want to print, and then specify the printing  
conditions.  
4. The machine receives the specified data from the digital camera and starts printing.  
• Some digital cameras require specifying settings manually for PictBridge operation. For details, see  
the manual provided with the digital camera.  
• Some digital cameras require manually operating a switch for PictBridge operation. For details, see  
the manual provided with the digital camera.  
• Some digital cameras need to be switched off when connecting to the printer. For details, see the  
manual provided with the digital camera.  
What Can Be Done on this Machine  
This machine can perform the following functions using its PictBridge feature.  
The settings available for these functions are as follows:  
• Single image printing  
• Selected image printing  
• All image printing  
• Index printing  
• Copies  
• Paper size  
• N-up layout  
• The setting parameters and their names may vary depending on the digital camera. For details, see  
the manuals provided with the digital camera.  
Exiting PictBridge  
Use the following procedure to quit the PictBridge mode.  
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while data is being sent to the machine. If you do, printing will  
fail.  
1. Check that "Ready" appears on the screen.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)  
2. Disconnect the USB cable from the machine.  
Make sure to close the cover of the USB flash disk port after use.  
When PictBridge Printing Does Not Work  
This section explains likely causes and possible solutions for problems that can occur during PictBridge  
printing.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
PictBridge is not available.  
There is a problem with the USB Use the following procedure to  
connection or the PictBridge  
settings.  
check the connection and  
settings:  
1. Disconnect and then  
reconnect the USB cable.  
2. Check the PictBridge  
settings are enabled.  
3. Disconnect the USB cable,  
and then turn off the  
machine. Turn the machine  
back on. When the  
machine has fully booted  
up, reconnect the USB  
cable.  
When two or more digital  
cameras are connected, the  
second and subsequent  
You have connected multiple  
digital cameras.  
Connect one digital camera  
only.  
Do not connect multiple  
cameras.  
cameras are not recognized.  
Cannot print.  
The specified number of prints  
exceeds the maximum number  
that can be printed at a time.  
The maximum specifiable print  
quantity at a time is 999.  
Change the quantity to 999 or  
less, and then retry printing.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Printing Documents  
Problem  
Cannot print.  
Cause  
Solution  
The specified type of paper is  
not loaded.  
The specified type of paper is  
not loaded.  
If you have to use paper that is  
not of the specified size,  
perform continue printing using  
mismatched paper or cancel the  
print job. For details, see  
Cannot print.  
The specified paper size is not  
supported by this machine.  
Select the paper with the size  
that can be printed on the  
machine.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Various Print Functions  
Using Various Print Functions  
This section briefly describes various print functions that you can configure with the printer driver to make  
printouts appropriate for your purposes.  
Print Quality Functions  
Print quality and color tone can be adjusted to suit the print data. Some of the print quality settings you  
can configure are described below.  
Printing color documents in black and white  
The black produced in black and white printing is a more distinct black than that produced in color  
printing.  
Separating the print data into CMYK and printing in designated color only  
Normally, all four colors (CMYK) are used for color printing. If you do not want to use certain  
colors, you can disable the use of those colors and print using other colors only.  
Saving toner when printing (Economy Color printing)  
You can save toner by printing with lower toner consumption. The amount of toner that will be used  
depends on the object, such as text, line, or image.  
Changing the image printing method  
You can select to print with priority on print quality or print speed. When printing images, the higher  
the resolution of images is, the longer the time is required for printing.  
Changing the dither pattern  
A dither pattern is a pattern of dots used to simulate a color or shade of an image. If the pattern is  
changed, the characteristics of the image will also change. You can select a pattern suitable for the  
image to be printed.  
Changing the color profiling pattern  
You can select a color profiling pattern to adjust the tone of colors according to the colors  
displayed on the computer screen.  
Because colors on the computer screen are created using the three RGB colors while colors for  
printing are composed of the four CMYK colors, colors need to be converted during the printing  
process. Therefore, images on the printed paper may look different from those on the computer  
screen if adjustment is not performed.  
Printing grayscale images using black or CMYK  
You can print black or gray sections of an image using black toner only, instead of using all CMYK  
toners. Compared to the black printed with CMYK toner, this results in a black that is flatter and  
purer.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Printing Documents  
Using ICM (Image Color Matching)  
You can use Windows ICM function to reproduce colors that appear on the computer screen as  
close as they are on printed paper.  
To use this function, the color profile must be added to the computer. You can find the color profile  
in the ICM folder stored on the provided printer driver CD-ROM. For information about adding a  
color profile, search Windows Help for "color profile", and then see the appropriate topic.  
• Some of the functions described above might not be available depending on the printer driver or  
operating system. For details, see the printer driver Help.  
Print Output Functions  
You can specify the form of print outputs according to your purposes. This section briefly describes some  
of the settings that you can specify.  
Printing multiple sets of a document  
You can print multiple sets of the same document.  
Collating the output in document batches  
You can print complete sets of a multiple-page document one set at a time (P1, P2, P1, P2 ...). If this  
function is not used when printing multiple sets, prints will be output in page batches (P1, P1, P2,  
P2 ...). This function is useful when, for example, making presentation materials.  
Changing orientation or rotating the image  
You can change the orientation of an image to portrait or landscape. You can also rotate the  
image by 180 degrees. Use rotation to prevent an image from being printed upside down when  
using paper with a predefined top and bottom (such as letterhead paper).  
Printing multiple pages per sheet  
You can print multiple pages onto one sheet of paper.  
When using this function, a suitable reduction ratio is selected automatically based on the paper  
size and the number of pages you want to fit on each sheet.  
Printing on both sides of paper (duplex printing)  
You can print on both sides of paper.  
Reducing or enlarging the document  
You can reduce or enlarge documents by a specific ratio, from 25% to 400% in 1% increments.  
You can also reduce or enlarge documents automatically to fit a specific paper size. This function is  
useful, for example, when printing Web pages.  
If the [Enable Large Papers] option is selected, A3/11 × 17/B4/8K documents can be scaled to  
a size that the machine supports, so that it can then be printed out.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Various Print Functions  
Not printing of blank pages  
If a print job contains blank pages, they can be prevented from being printed.  
Note that this setting has higher priority than [Blank Page Print] under printer feature settings of the  
control panel.  
Printing with a cover page  
You can add a cover page to the print job.  
You can select to leave the cover page blank, or print the first page of the document on the cover  
page. If a cover page is inserted into a duplex job, you can print on its back side also.  
Paper for the cover page can either be the same as or different from the remaining pages.  
Printing on custom size paper  
You can print using non-standard size paper by specifying the size of the paper as custom size.  
To specify the custom paper size, select [Custom Paper Size] from the [Document Size:] list, and  
then click the [Custom Paper Size...] button in the lower part of the dialog box to configure the  
paper size.  
Superimposing text on prints (watermark)  
You can superimpose watermark text on prints. Various predefined watermarks are provided. You  
can also create your own watermarks.  
• Some of the functions described above might not be available depending on the printer driver or  
operating system. For details, see the printer driver Help.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Printing Documents  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Copying Originals  
Copier Mode Screen  
This section provides information about the screen when the machine is in copier mode.  
By default, the display shows the copier screen when the machine is turned on.  
If the scanner or fax screen is shown on the display, press the [Copy] key on the control panel to switch  
to the copier screen.  
DAC505  
Screen in standby mode  
DAC600  
1. Current status or messages  
Displays the current status or messages.  
2. Current settings  
Displays the current tray, reproduction ratio, and scan settings.  
3. Selection key items  
Displays the functions you can use by pressing the corresponding selection keys.  
4. Copy quantity  
Displays the current copy quantity. You can change the copy quantity using the number keys.  
• The start-up mode can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under [Admin. Tools]. For  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Copying Originals  
Basic Operation  
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place  
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.  
1. Press the [Copy] key.  
DAC505  
2. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.  
If necessary, configure advanced photocopy settings.  
3. To make multiple copies, enter the number of copies using the number keys.  
4. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.  
DAC519  
To make black-and-white photocopies, press the [B&W Start] key.  
To make color photocopies, press the [Color Start] key.  
• The maximum number of copies is 99.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Operation  
• You can change the paper tray for the current job by pressing the [ ] or [ ] key. If tray 2 is  
installed, you can select to change the paper tray automatically according to the paper size (A4 or  
Letter).  
• You can select the paper tray for printing out copies in [Select Paper] under copy settings. If you set  
the machine to switch between Tray 1 and 2 automatically depending on the paper size in this  
setting, you can also specify the tray the machine uses first in [Paper Tray Priority] under tray paper  
• When making multiple copies of a multi-page document, you can select whether copies are output  
in collated sets, or in page batches in the [Sort] setting under copy settings. [Sort] cannot be used  
• If a paper jam occurs, printing stops after the current page has been printed out. After the jammed  
paper is removed, printing restarts from the jammed page automatically.  
• If a scanning jam occurs in the ADF, copying is canceled immediately. In this case, copy the  
originals again starting from the jammed page. For the direction to remove the jammed paper, see  
Canceling a Copy  
While scanning the original  
If copying is canceled while the machine is scanning the original, copying is canceled immediately  
and there is no printout.  
If originals are placed in the ADF, scanning is canceled immediately and all originals are ejected.  
While printing  
If copying is canceled during printing, the photocopy process is canceled after the current page  
has been printed out.  
Follow the procedure below to cancel copying.  
1. Press the [Copy] key.  
DAC505  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Copying Originals  
2. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.  
DAC517  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies  
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies  
There are two ways to set the scaling ratio: using a preset ratio or manually specifying a customized  
ratio.  
Preset ratio  
DAC578  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
50%, 71%, 82%, 93%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%  
(mainly North America)  
50%, 65%, 78%, 93%, 129%, 155%, 200%, 400%  
Custom ratio  
CES106  
25% to 400% in 1% increments.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Copying Originals  
Specifying Reduce/Enlarge  
1. Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.  
DAC512  
2. Press [Reduce], [Enlarge], or [Zoom].  
For [Reduce] or [Enlarge], press the [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] key to select the desired ratio. For [Zoom],  
specify the desired ratio using the number keys.  
3. Press the [OK] key.  
• You can change the machine's default [Reduce/Enlarge] setting to always make photocopies in  
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:  
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while  
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.  
• When the machine's mode is changed.  
• When the power is turned off.  
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing  
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided  
and Combined Printing  
This section explains how to combine and print a multiple pages (two or four pages) on one side or both  
sides of paper.  
• This function is only available when the original is set in the ADF, not when it is set on the exposure  
glass.  
• To use combined copy, the paper size used for printing copies must be set to A4, Letter or Legal.  
• To use 2-sided copy, the paper size used for printing copies must be set to A4, B5 JIS, Legal,  
1
Letter, Executive, 8 × 13, 8 / × 13, Folio, or 16K.  
2
• The paper for 2-sided copy is fed from Tray 1 or 2, but not from the bypass tray.  
• The types of paper that can be used for 2-sided copy are thin, plain, middle thick, recycled, color,  
preprinted and prepunched.  
There are following copy modes. Select a copy mode according to your original and how you want the  
copy outputs to appear.  
Combined copy on one side  
In this mode, a two or four-page original is combined and printed on one side of paper.  
• 1Sd 2Orig->Comb 2on1 1Sd  
Original  
Copy  
CMF250  
• 1Sd 4Orig->Comb 4on1 1Sd  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Copying Originals  
Original  
Copy  
Left to Right  
Top to Bottom  
Left to Right  
Top to Bottom  
CMF251  
Combined copy on both sides  
In this mode, a multiple-page original is combined and printed on both sides of paper.  
• 1Sd 4Orig->Comb 2on1 2Sd  
Original  
Copy  
Top to Top  
Top to Bottom  
Top to Top  
Top to Bottom  
CMF254  
• 1Sd 8Orig->Comb 4on1 2Sd  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing  
Original  
Copy  
Left to Right, Top to Top  
Left to Right, Top to Bottom  
8
6
5
6
8
7
Top to Bottom, Top to Top  
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom  
8
7
5
7
8
6
CMF255  
Original  
Copy  
Left to Right, Top to Top  
Left to Right, Top to Bottom  
8
6
5
6
8
7
Top to Bottom, Top to Top  
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom  
8
7
5
7
8
6
CMF256  
2-sided copy: 2 Sided Orig->2 Sided Copy  
In this mode, one-sided pages are printed on the front and back sides of paper without being  
combined.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Copying Originals  
Original  
Copy  
Top to Top  
Top to Bottom  
Top to Top  
Top to Bottom  
CMF260  
Specifying Combined and 2-sided Copies  
1. Press [Dup/Comb].  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired copy mode, and then press the [OK] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select paper orientation and page order, and then press the  
[OK] key.  
4. Press the [Escape] key.  
The screen will show the selected copy mode.  
• You can change the machine's default [Duplex/Combine] setting to always make photocopies in  
• Setting combined and 2-sided copying automatically disables the [ID Card Copy] setting.  
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:  
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while  
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.  
• When the machine's mode is changed.  
• When the power is turned off.  
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing (Manual 2-Sided Copying)  
Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and  
Combined Printing (Manual 2-Sided Copying)  
This section explains how to make 2-sided copies of 2-sided originals, or copy two original pages to  
one sheet, or copy four original pages to one sheet with two pages per side.  
DAC602  
DAC603  
DAC603  
• [2Sd 1Orig->Comb 2on1 1Sd], [2Sd 2Orig->Comb 4on1 1Sd], [2 Sided Orig->2 Sided Copy],  
[2Sd 2Orig->Comb 2on1 2Sd], or [2Sd 4Orig->Comb 4on1 2Sd] is available for copying using  
the ADF, but not using the exposure glass.  
• Copy to the front and back of the sheet in the same color mode. If you try to copy in a different  
mode, an alarm sounds.  
The following six types of manual 2-sided copying are available.  
2Sd 1Orig->Comb 2on1 1Sd  
Copies one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet.  
2Sd 2Orig->Comb 4on1 1Sd  
Copies two 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.  
2 Sided Orig->2 Sided Copy  
Makes 2-sided copies of 2-sided originals.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Copying Originals  
2Sd 2Orig->Comb 2on1 2Sd  
Copies both sides of one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet, and both sides of another 2-sided  
original to the other side of the sheet.  
2Sd 4Orig->Comb 4on1 2Sd  
Copies four 2-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.  
Manual 2 Sided Scan Mode  
Select this mode to make 2-sided copies using the exposure glass.  
Manually Performing 2-Sided Copying Using the ADF  
• Make sure the same number of pages will be printed on the front and back of all sheets.  
Otherwise, the job will be reset.  
1. Press [Dup/Comb].  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired copy mode, and then press the [OK] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select paper orientation and page order, and then press the  
[OK] key.  
4. Place all 2-sided originals into the ADF with their fronts facing up.  
5. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.  
6. After all originals are delivered, place them into the ADF again with their fronts facing  
down.  
7. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key again.  
Use the same mode (color or black-and-white) for both sides.  
After all pages have been scanned, copying starts.  
• After you place the originals, press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key within the time  
• If the memory becomes full while originals are being scanned, the job is canceled.  
Manually Performing 2-Sided Copying Using the Exposure Glass  
• If you print odd-number pages while using [Manual 2 Sided Scan Mode], you cannot print the last  
page. In this case, print the last page with [Dup/Comb] set to [Off].  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing (Manual 2-Sided Copying)  
1. Press [Dup/Comb].  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Manual 2 Sided Scan Mode], and then press the [OK]  
key.  
3. Place the original front side down and top to the machine rear on the exposure glass.  
Place the originals one by one.  
4. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.  
5. After "Set Back Side & Start" appears on the display, place it on the exposure glass again  
with its back facing down.  
6. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key again.  
Use the same mode (color or black-and-white) for both sides.  
• After you place the originals, press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key within the time  
• This function is not available with the Sort function.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Copying Originals  
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One  
Side of Paper  
This section explains how to copy the front and back sides of an ID card or other small documents onto  
one side of a sheet of paper.  
• This function is available only when the original is set on the exposure glass, not when it is set in the  
ADF.  
• To use this function, the paper size used for printing copies must be set to A4 or Letter.  
Printed paper size  
Scanned paper size  
A5 (148×210 mm)  
Half Letter (140×216 mm)  
A4  
Letter  
CES165  
Copying an ID Card  
1. Press the [ID Card Copy] key.  
DAC508  
To make the [ID Card Copy] key enable ID card copy mode for the current job, [Shortcut to  
Function] under administrator settings must be set to [ID Card Copy Mode].  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Side of Paper  
If the ID card copy mode does not appear even though you have pressed the [ID Card Copy] key,  
set [Shortcut to Function] to [ID Card Copy Mode], and then press the [ID Card Copy] key again.  
2. Place the original front side down and top to the machine rear on the exposure glass.  
Place the original in the center of the A5/Half Letter scan area.  
DAC601  
3. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.  
A message prompting you to place the original back side down on the exposure glass appears on  
the display.  
4. Place the original back side down and top to the machine rear on the exposure glass, and  
then press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key again.  
Use the same mode (color or black-and-white) for both sides.  
• After you load the originals, press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key within the time specified  
• Regardless of the machine's reduction or enlargement ratio setting, an ID card copy will always be  
made at 100%.  
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:  
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while  
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.  
• When the machine's mode is changed.  
• When the power is turned off.  
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Copying Originals  
Specifying the Scan Settings  
This section explains how to specify image density and scan quality for the current job.  
Adjusting Image Density  
There are five image density levels. The higher the density level, the darker the printout.  
1. Press the [Density] key.  
DAC511  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired density level, and then press the [OK] key.  
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always make copies with a specific  
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:  
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while  
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.  
• When the machine's mode is changed.  
• When the power is turned off.  
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.  
Selecting the Document Type According to Original  
There are three document types:  
Mixed  
Select this when the original contains both text and photographs or pictures.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Specifying the Scan Settings  
Text  
Select this when the original contains only text and no photographs or pictures.  
Photo  
Select this when the original contains only photographs or pictures. Use this mode for the following  
types of original:  
• Photographs  
• Pages that are entirely or mainly photographs or pictures, such as magazine pages.  
Specifying the Original Type  
1. Press the [Image Quality] key.  
DAC510  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired document type, and then press the [OK] key.  
• You can change the machine's default [Original Type] setting to always make copies with a  
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:  
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while  
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.  
• When the machine's mode is changed.  
• When the power is turned off.  
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Copying Originals  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Scanning Originals  
Scanner Mode Screen  
This section provides information about the screen in scanner mode.  
By default, the display shows the copier screen when the machine is turned on. If the copier or fax  
screen is shown on the display, press the [Scanner] key on the control panel to switch to the scanner  
screen.  
DAC507  
Screen in standby mode  
1
Ready  
Specify Dest.  
300 x 300dpi  
Sing/Mul  
2
8 1/2 x 11  
3
Scn Size  
DAC526  
1. Current status or messages  
Displays the current status or messages.  
2. Current settings  
Displays the current scanning mode and scan settings.  
• When "Specify Dest." is displayed:  
Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or Scan to Folder functions can be used.  
• When "Save Scn Data to USB" is displayed:  
A USB flash disk is inserted in the machine, and the Scan to USB function can be used.  
3. Selection key items  
Displays the functions you can use by pressing the corresponding selection keys.  
• The machine's default mode at power on can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5. Scanning Originals  
Registering Scan Destinations  
This section explains how to register scan destinations in the Address Book. To send scanned files to an  
e-mail address (Scan to E-mail), FTP server (Scan to FTP), or a shared folder on a network computer  
(Scan to Folder), you must first register the destination in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor.  
• The Address Book data could be damaged or lost unexpectedly. The manufacturer shall not be  
responsible for any damages resulting from such data loss. Be sure to create backup files of the  
Address Book data periodically.  
• Depending on your network environment, the Scan to FTP and Scan to Folder functions may  
require a user name and password to be correctly entered in the destination information. In such  
cases, after registering destinations, check that the user name and password are correctly entered  
by sending test documents to those destinations by clicking [Connection Test].  
The Address Book can contain up to 100 entries, including 20 Quick Dial entries.  
Destinations registered as Quick Dial entries can be selected by pressing the corresponding One Touch  
button.  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Scan Destination].  
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [E-mail Address], [FTP] or [Folder].  
4. Register information as necessary.  
The information you must register varies depending on the destination type. For details, see the  
tables below.  
5. Enter the administrator password if required.  
6. Click [Apply].  
7. Close the Web browser.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Registering Scan Destinations  
Scan to E-mail Settings  
Item  
Setting  
Description  
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial  
entry.  
Quick Dial Number  
Optional  
Name of the destination. The name specified here will  
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan  
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.  
Name  
Required  
Required  
E-mail address of the destination. Can contain up to  
64 characters.  
Destination E-mail Address  
E-mail address to which a notification is sent after  
transmission. Can contain up to 64 characters.  
Notification E-mail Address  
Subject  
Optional  
Required  
Subject of the e-mail. Can contain up to 64 characters.  
Name of e-mail sender. The name specified here will  
be shown under "From" or a similar field of the  
recipient's email application. Can contain up to 32  
characters.  
Sender's Name  
Optional  
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.  
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple  
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.  
File Format (Color/Gray  
Scale)  
Required  
Required  
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black  
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats  
support multiple pages in a document.  
File Format (Black & White)  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Scanning Originals  
Item  
Setting  
Description  
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,  
A4, Executive, Half Letter, Letter, Legal, or custom size.  
Scan Size  
Optional  
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and  
then specify the width and length.  
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,  
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.  
Resolution  
Optional  
Optional  
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left  
buttons. These keys increase or decrease the image  
density in single increments up to 5.  
Density  
Scan to FTP Settings  
Item  
Setting  
Description  
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial  
entry.  
Quick Dial Number  
Optional  
Name of the destination. The name specified here will  
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan  
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.  
Name  
Required  
Required  
Required  
Name or IP address of the FTP server. Can contain up  
to 64 characters.  
Hostname or IP Address  
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.  
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple  
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.  
File Format (Color/Gray  
Scale)  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering Scan Destinations  
Item  
Setting  
Description  
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black  
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats  
support multiple pages in a document.  
File Format (Black & White)  
Required  
User name for logging in to the FTP server. Can  
contain up to 32 characters.  
FTP User Name  
FTP Password  
Optional  
Optional  
Optional  
Optional  
Password for logging in to the FTP server. Can contain  
up to 32 characters.  
Name of the FTP server directory where scanned files  
are stored. Can contain up to 64 characters.  
Directory  
E-mail address to which a notification is sent after  
transmission. Can contain up to 64 characters.  
Notification E-mail Address  
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,  
A4, Executive, Half Letter, Letter, Legal, or custom size.  
Scan Size  
Optional  
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and  
then specify the width and length.  
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,  
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.  
Resolution  
Density  
Optional  
Optional  
-
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left  
buttons. These keys increase or decrease the image  
density in single increments up to 5.  
A connection test is performed to check whether the  
specified FTP server exists.  
Connection Test  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Scanning Originals  
Scan to Folder Settings  
Item  
Setting  
Description  
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial  
entry.  
Quick Dial Number  
Optional  
Name of the destination. The name specified here will  
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan  
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.  
Name  
Required  
Required  
Optional  
Path to the directory where scanned files will be stored.  
Consists of the IP address or name of the destination  
computer (can contain up to 64 characters), and name  
of the shared folder (can contain up to 32 characters).  
Service Name  
Domain  
If the destination computer is a member of an Active  
Directory domain, specify that domain name. Can  
contain up to 15 characters.  
User name for logging in to the destination computer.  
Can contain up to 32 characters.  
Login User Name  
Login Password  
Optional  
Optional  
Optional  
Optional  
Password for logging in to the destination computer.  
Can contain up to 32 characters.  
Directory within the shared folder for storing scanned  
files. Can contain up to 64 characters.  
Directory  
E-mail address to which a notification is sent after  
transmission. Can contain up to 64 characters.  
Notification E-mail Address  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering Scan Destinations  
Item  
Setting  
Description  
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.  
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple  
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.  
File Format (Color/Gray  
Scale)  
Required  
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black  
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats  
support multiple pages in a document.  
File Format (Black & White)  
Scan Size  
Required  
Optional  
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,  
A4, Executive, Half Letter, Letter, Legal, or custom size.  
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and  
then specify the width and length.  
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,  
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.  
Resolution  
Density  
Optional  
Optional  
-
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left  
buttons. These keys increase or decrease the image  
density in single increments up to 5.  
A connection test is performed to check whether the  
specified shared folder exists.  
Connection Test  
• To send files via e-mail, SMTP and DNS settings must be configured properly. For details about  
• If you are using the Scan to E-mail function, select a time zone according to your geographic  
location to send email with correct transmission date and time. For details about the time zone  
• To send files to an FTP server or computer, the user name, password, and directory must be  
configured properly.  
• On a network that uses a DNS server, specify a computer name in [Service Name] and the name  
of the domain to which the computer belongs in [Domain]. In this case, also configure the DNS  
related settings using Web Image Monitor.  
• The Scan to Folder destination must operate on one of the following operating systems: Windows  
XP/Vista/7/8, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012, or Mac OS X 10.6.  
• Scan destinations cannot be registered using the control panel.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Scanning Originals  
Modifying Scan Destinations  
This section explains how to modify the information of registered destinations.  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [Scan Destination].  
3. Click the [E-mail Address], [FTP], or [Folder] tab.  
4. Select the entry to modify, and then click [Change].  
5. Modify settings as necessary.  
6. Enter the administrator password if required.  
7. Click [Apply].  
8. Close the Web browser.  
• You can unassign a Quick Dial entry from a One-touch button from the [Quick Dial Destination]  
page. To do this, select the desired entry, click [Delete], and then click [Apply] again on a  
confirmation page.  
• The machine will notify you if the destination you want to modify is set as a forwarding destination  
Deleting Scan Destinations  
This section explains how to delete registered destinations.  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [Scan Destination].  
3. Click the [E-mail Address], [FTP], or [Folder] tab.  
4. Select the entry to delete, and then click [Delete].  
5. Confirm that the entry you have selected is the entry that you want to delete.  
6. Enter the administrator password if required.  
7. Click [Apply].  
8. Close the Web browser.  
• The machine will notify you if the destination you want to delete is set as a forwarding destination of  
received faxes. If you delete the destination anyway, reconfigure the fax forwarding setting. For  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Operation  
Basic Operation  
Scanning using the control panel allows you to send scanned files via e-mail (Scan to E-mail), to an FTP  
server (Scan to FTP), or to the shared folder of a computer on a network (Scan to Folder), or to a USB  
flash disk (Scan to USB).  
The Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and Scan to Folder functions are available only through a network  
connection. No network connection is required for the Scan to USB function; you can send scanned files  
directly to a USB flash disk inserted into the front of the machine.  
Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder  
This section describes the basic operation for sending scanned files via e-mail, to an FTP server, or to a  
computer. The scanned file is sent via E-mail, to an FTP server, or a computer, depending on the  
specified destination.  
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place  
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.  
• When using the Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP or Scan to Folder function, you must first register the  
• If a USB flash disk is inserted in the machine, scanning functions other than Scan to USB are not  
possible from the control panel. Make sure there is no USB flash disk inserted in the machine.  
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.  
2. Press the [Scanner] key.  
DAC507  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5. Scanning Originals  
3. Press the [Address Book] key.  
Alternatively, you can press the [ID Card Copy] key if [Shortcut to Function] under administrator  
settings is set to [Select Scanner Dest.]. Press the key to switch to the scanner destination selection  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to scroll the Address Book, and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Search for the desired destination by pressing the [ ] or [ ] key to scroll the Address  
Book, and then press the [OK] key.  
When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically according  
to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary, you can change  
6. Press the [B&W Start] key or the [Color Start] key.  
DAC519  
To scan in black and white, press the [B&W Start] key.  
To scan in color, press the [Color Start] key.  
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when  
scanning from the exposure glass.  
Start Scanning Next?  
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.  
7. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass, and  
then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.  
8. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.  
• To cancel scanning, press the [Scanner] key, and then press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files  
are discarded.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
• You can also specify a destination using the One Touch buttons, [Pause/Redial] key. For details,  
• If the [Limitless Scan] setting under scanner settings is enabled, you can place originals on the  
exposure glass repeatedly in a single scan procedure. For details about [Limitless Scan], see  
• If [Single/ Multi Page] under scanner settings is set to [Multi-page], you can scan multiple pages to  
create a single PDF or TIFF file containing all pages. However, if the file format is JPEG, a single-  
• If paper is jammed in the ADF, the scan job will be discarded. Remove the jammed paper and scan  
Specifying the scan destination using the One Touch buttons or [Pause/Redial] key  
This section explains how to specify a destination using the following keys:  
• One Touch buttons  
Use these to specify destinations registered as Quick Dial entries.  
• [Pause/Redial] key  
Press this to specify the last used destination as the destination for the current job.  
Using the One Touch buttons  
Press the One Touch button to which the desired Quick Dial entry is registered.  
Press the [Shift] key to toggle the One Touch buttons between Quick Dial entries Nos.1 to 10 and  
Nos. 11 to 20.  
DAC516  
Using the [Pause/Redial] key  
Press the [Pause/Redial] key to select the last used destination.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Scanning Originals  
DAC515  
• When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically according  
to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary, you can change  
• The [Pause/Redial] key is not effective for the first scan job after the machine is turned on.  
• To select destinations not registered as Quick Dial entries, use the [Address Book] key. For  
• You can press the [Clear/Stop] key to clear the destination.  
Basic Operation for Scan to USB  
This section describes the basic operation for sending scanned files to a USB flash disk.  
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place  
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.  
• This machine does not support the use of USB flash disks connected to external USB hubs. Insert  
your USB flash disk directly into the USB flash disk port located at the top left corner of the  
machine.  
• Certain types of USB flash disks cannot be used.  
• Select to enable the Scan to USB feature, specify [Active] for the [Save Scn Data to USB] setting  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Operation  
1. Insert your USB flash disk into the USB flash disk port.  
1
2
DAC031  
2. Press the [Scanner] key.  
DAC507  
"Loading..." appears on the display. Wait until the display changes to show "Save Scn Data to  
USB" (the duration depends on your USB flash disk).  
3. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.  
4. Press the [B&W Start] key or the [Color Start] key.  
DAC519  
To scan in black and white, press the [B&W Start] key.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Scanning Originals  
To scan in color, press the [Color Start] key.  
Depending on the machine's setting, you will see the following screen on the display.  
• When in halftone black-and-white scanning mode:  
• When in color or gray scale black-and-white scanning mode:  
5. Press the appropriate selection key according to the desired file format.  
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when  
scanning from the exposure glass.  
Start Scanning Next?  
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step. If not, proceed to Step 8.  
6. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass, and  
then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.  
7. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.  
8. Confirm that "Ready" appears on the display.  
The scanned file is created in the root directory of the USB flash disk.  
9. Remove the USB flash disk from the machine.  
Make sure to close the cover of the USB flash disk port after use.  
• To cancel scanning, press the [Scanner] key, and then press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files  
are discarded.  
• You can configure the machine to perform black-and-white scanning in halftone or grayscale by  
changing [B&W Scanning Mode] setting under scanner settings. For details about [B&W Scanning  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
• If the [Limitless Scan] setting under scanner settings is enabled, you can place originals on the  
exposure glass repeatedly in a single scan procedure. For details about [Limitless Scan], see  
• If the [Single/ Multi Page] setting under scanner settings is set to [Multi-page], you can scan  
multiple pages to create a single PDF or TIFF file containing all pages. However, if the file format is  
JPEG, a single-page file will be created for every page scanned. For details about [Single/ Multi  
• If paper is jammed in the ADF, the scan job will be put on hold. To resume the current job, remove  
the jammed paper and scan the originals again starting from the jammed page. For details about  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Scanning Originals  
Specifying the Scan Settings  
This section explains how to specify the scanning size, image density, and resolution for the current job.  
When a scan destination is specified  
When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically according  
to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary, you can change  
the scan settings for the current job using the control panel.  
• The machine maintains the preset scan settings for the current destination until the machine returns  
to standby mode.  
• Changing the preset scan settings for the current destination does not change the information  
registered in the Address Book.  
• If you specify the last used destination, the preset scan settings become effective again, even if you  
have changed the settings for the previous job.  
Specifying the Scanning Size According to the Size of the Original  
This section explains how to specify the scanning size according to the size of the current original.  
1. Press [Reduce/Enlarge] key or [Scn Size].  
DAC512  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the size of the original, and then press the [OK] key.  
If you selected anything other than [Custom Size], you do not need to perform the remaining steps  
of the procedure.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [mm] or [inch], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Enter the width using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
To enter a decimal point, press the [ ] key.  
5. Enter the length using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
To enter a decimal point, press the [ ] key.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifying the Scan Settings  
• You can change the machine's default [Scan Size] setting to always scan originals with a specific  
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:  
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while  
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.  
• When the machine's mode is changed.  
• When the power is turned off.  
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed  
Adjusting Image Density  
This section explains how to adjust image density for the current job.  
There are five image density levels. The higher the density level, the darker the scanned image.  
1. Press the [Density] key.  
DAC511  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired density level, and then press the [OK] key.  
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always scan with a specific density level.  
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:  
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while  
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.  
• When the machine's mode is changed.  
• When the power is turned off.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Scanning Originals  
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.  
Specifying Resolution  
This section explains how to specify the scan resolution for the current job.  
There are six resolution settings. The higher the resolution, the higher the quality but greater the file size.  
1. Press the [Image Quality] key.  
DAC510  
2. Press the [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] key to select the desired resolution, and then press the [OK]  
key.  
• You can change the machine's default [Resolution] setting to always scan with a specific resolution  
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:  
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while  
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.  
• When the machine's mode is changed.  
• When the power is turned off.  
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning from a Computer  
Scanning from a Computer  
Scanning from a computer connected by the network or USB (TWAIN scanning and WIA scanning)  
allows you to operate the machine from your computer and scan originals into your computer directly.  
Basic Operation for TWAIN Scanning  
This section describes the basic TWAIN scanning operation.  
TWAIN scanning is possible if a TWAIN-compatible application is running on your computer.  
Using TWAIN Scanner  
This section describes the preparations and procedure for using the TWAIN scanner.  
• To use the TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN driver, which is on the supplied CD-ROM.  
• To use the TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application must be installed.  
To use the machine as a TWAIN scanner, first do the following:  
• Install the TWAIN driver.  
• Install a TWAIN-compliant application.  
TWAIN Scanning  
TWAIN scanning is possible if your computer is running a TWAIN-compatible application.  
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.  
2. Open the properties dialog box for this machine using a TWAIN-compatible application.  
3. Configure the scan settings as required, and then click [Scan].  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5. Scanning Originals  
Settings you can configure in the TWAIN dialog box  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DAC525  
1. Scanner:  
Select the scanner you want to use. The scanner you select becomes the default scanner. Click [Refresh] to  
discover all available scanners connected via USB or the network.  
2. Original:  
Select [Reflective] to scan from the exposure glass, or [Automatic Document Feeder] to scan from the ADF.  
3. Original type  
According to your original, select a setting from the list of options detailed below, or select [Custom...] to  
configure your own scan settings. "Mode", "Resolution", and "Size" under "Scan Configuration" will change  
according to the Original type setting you selected here.  
• When using the exposure glass:  
[Editing Text(OCR)]  
[Faxing, Filing, or Copying]  
[Black and White Photo]  
[Color Document - Fast]  
[Color Document - Better Quality]  
[Custom...]  
• When using the ADF:  
[ADF-Faster]  
[ADF-Better]  
[ADF - Gray]  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning from a Computer  
[Custom...]  
4. Mode:  
Select from color, grayscale, or black-and-white.  
5. Resolution:  
Select a resolution from the list. If you select [User defined], enter a resolution value directly in the edit box.  
Note that increasing the resolution also increases the file size and scanning time.  
Selectable resolutions vary depending on where the original is set.  
• When using the exposure glass:  
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 dpi, User defined  
• When using the ADF:  
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600 dpi, User defined  
6. Size:  
Select the scanning size. If you select [User defined], enter the scanning size directly in the edit box. Also, you  
can change the scanning size with your mouse in the preview area. You can select the unit of measure from  
[cm], [inches], or [pixels]. Selectable resolutions vary depending on where the original is set. For details, see  
the TWAIN Help.  
7. Scan task: (when using the exposure glass)  
Displays up to 10 previously used scan areas. To remove a scan task, select the number of the task, and then  
click [Remove]. You can select [AutoCrop] to let the scanner automatically detect the size of your original.  
• If the scan data is larger than the memory capacity, an error message appears and scanning is  
canceled. If this happens, specify a lower resolution and scan the original again.  
Basic Operation for WIA Scanning  
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.  
2. On the [Start] menu on your computer, click [Devices and Printers].  
3. Right-click the icon of the printer model you want to use, and then click [Start scan] to  
open the dialog box for the scan settings.  
4. In the dialog box, configure the scan settings as required, and then click [Scan].  
5. Click [Import].  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Scanning Originals  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Fax Mode Screen  
This section provides information about the screen in fax mode.  
By default, the display shows the copier screen when the machine is turned on.  
If the copy or scanner screen is shown on the display, press the [Facsimile] key on the control panel to  
switch to the fax screen.  
DAC506  
Screen in standby mode  
1
4
2
3
Del File  
RX File  
DAC001  
1. Current status or messages  
Displays the current status or messages.  
2. Current settings  
Displays the current density and resolution settings.  
3. Selection key items  
Displays the functions you can use by pressing the corresponding selection keys.  
4. Current date and time  
Shows the current date and time.  
• The machine's default mode at power on can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
• The display format for time and date can be specified in [Set Date/Time] under [Admin. Tools]. For  
• If the Alert indicator flashes on the initial fax display, press the [Copy] key and check the displayed  
message.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Date and Time  
Setting the Date and Time  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Set Date/Time], and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Set Date], and then press the [OK] key.  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired date format, and then press the [OK] key.  
7. Enter the current date using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
You can press the [ ] or [ ] key to move between fields.  
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Set Time], and then press the [OK] key.  
9. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired time format, and then press the [OK] key.  
10. Enter the current time using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.  
If you selected [12-hour Format], press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [AM] or [PM].  
You can press the [ ] or [ ] key to move between fields.  
11. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock]. For  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Entering Characters  
To enter characters, use keys as follows:  
To enter a digit  
Press a number key.  
To delete a character  
Press the [ ] key.  
To enter a fax number  
• To enter a number  
Use the number keys.  
• To enter characters other than digits  
"
"
": Press the [ ] key.  
": Press the [ ] key.  
Pause: Press the [Pause/Redial] key. "P" appears on the screen.  
Space: Press the [ ] key.  
To enter a name  
Letters, numbers, and symbols can be entered using the number keys.  
To enter two characters consecutively that use the same number key, press the [ ] key to move the  
cursor before entering the second character.  
œ
~
\
DAC442  
• Characters you can enter depend on the setting you are configuring.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Entering Characters  
• If the number you entered is too large or too small for the setting, it will not be accepted. If you  
press the [OK] key, the machine will increase or decrease the number to the minimum or maximum  
value for the setting.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Registering Fax Destinations  
This section explains how to register fax destinations in the Address Book using the control panel or Web  
Image Monitor. The Address Book allows you to specify fax destinations quickly and easily.  
• The Address Book data could be damaged or lost unexpectedly. The manufacturer shall not be  
responsible for any damages resulting from such data loss. Be sure to create backup files of the  
The Address Book can contain up to 220 entries (20 Quick Dial entries and 200 Speed Dial entries).  
Quick Dial entries  
Destinations registered as Quick Dial entries can be selected by pressing the corresponding One  
Touch button.  
Speed Dial entries  
Destinations registered as Speed Dial entries can be selected from the Address Book. Press the  
[Address Book] key, and then select the desired entry using the [ ] or [ ] key.  
Registering Fax Destinations Using the Control Panel  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Address Book], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Quick Dial Dest.] or [Fax Speed Dial Dest.], and then  
press the [OK] key.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Registering Fax Destinations  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [No.:], and then enter the desired Quick Dial number (1  
to 20) or Speed Dial number (1 to 200) using the number keys.  
If a destination is already registered for the input number, the fax number and fax name registered  
for that number appear.  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Fax No.], and then enter the fax number (up to 40  
characters).  
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Name], and then enter the fax name (up to 20  
characters).  
8. Confirm the setting, and then press the [OK] key.  
9. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [ID Card Copy] key if [Shortcut to Function] under administrator  
settings is set to [Address Book for FAX]. Press the key to switch to the [Address book] menu. For  
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, pause, " ", " ", and space.  
• If necessary, insert a pause in the fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits  
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under  
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in the fax number. " " switches the dialing  
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.  
• If the machine is connected to the telephone network through a PBX, make sure to enter the outside  
line access number specified in [PBX Access Number] before the fax number. For [PBX Access  
• Use Web Image Monitor to register an Internet Fax destination (an e-mail address). For details  
• A password for accessing the [Address Book] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock]. For  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Modifying or deleting fax destinations  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Address Book], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
A password for accessing the [Address Book] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock]. For  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Quick Dial Dest.] or [Fax Speed Dial Dest.], and then  
press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [No.:], and then enter the desired Quick Dial number (1  
to 20 or Speed Dial number (1 to 200) using the number keys.  
The fax number and fax name registered for that number appear.  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Fax No.], and then modify the fax number (up to 40  
characters).  
If you want to delete the fax number, press the [ ] key until the current number is deleted.  
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Name], and then modify the fax name (up to 20  
characters).  
If you want to delete the fax name, press the [ ] key until the current name is deleted.  
8. Confirm the setting, and then press the [OK] key.  
9. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
Registering Fax Destinations Using Web Image Monitor  
1. Start the Web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Fax Speed Dial Destination].  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Registering Fax Destinations  
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [Fax].  
4. Select [Quick Dial Number] or [Speed Dial Number], and then select the registration  
number from the list.  
5. Register information as necessary.  
6. Enter the administrator password if required.  
7. Click [Apply].  
8. Close the Web browser.  
Fax destination settings  
Item  
Setting  
Required  
Description  
Quick Dial Number /  
Speed Dial Number  
Select the number to which you want to register Quick  
Dial or Speed Dial destination.  
Name of the destination. The name specified here will  
be shown on the screen when selecting a fax  
destination. Can contain up to 20 characters.  
Name  
Optional  
Fax number of the destination. Can contain up to 40  
characters.  
If the machine is connected to the telephone network  
through a PBX, make sure to enter the outside line  
access number specified in [PBX Access Number]  
before the fax number. For [PBX Access Number], see  
Fax Number  
Required  
E-mail address of the destination of the Internet Fax.  
Can contain up to 64 characters.  
E-mail Address  
Optional  
This setting appears only for the Type 2 model.  
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, "P" (pause), " ", " ", "-", and space.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
• If necessary, insert a pause in the fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits  
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under  
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in the fax number. " " switches the dialing  
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.  
Modifying fax destinations  
1. Start the Web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Fax Speed Dial Destination].  
If you modify the Speed Dial entry, proceed to Step 4.  
3. Click [Fax Quick Dial Destination].  
4. Select the entry to modify, and then click [Change].  
If you want to delete the entry, click [Delete].  
5. Modify settings as necessary.  
To delete the entry, confirm the entry you have selected.  
6. Enter the administrator password if required.  
7. Click [Apply].  
8. Close the Web browser.  
Preventing Transmission to the Wrong Destination  
If you want to prevent documents being sent to the wrong destination, you can configure the machine to  
prompt users twice for the destination, or to display the entered destination prior to transmission.  
Re-entering a fax number to confirm destination  
Enter the fax number again to confirm the destination is correct.  
Transmission is disabled if the confirmation fax number does not match the first fax number. This function  
helps prevent users accidentally sending faxes to the wrong destination.  
• This function is available only when an administrator password is specified.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Registering Fax Destinations  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Fax Number Confirmation], and then press the [OK]  
key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [On] or [Off], and then press the [OK] key.  
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock]. For  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Sending a Fax  
• It is recommended that you call the receiver and confirm with them when sending important  
documents.  
Selecting Transmission Mode  
There are two transmission modes: Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission.  
Memory Transmission  
In this mode, the machine scans several originals into memory and sends them all at once. This is  
convenient when you are in a hurry and want to take the document away from the machine. In this  
mode, you can send a fax to multiple destinations. You can enable the [Auto Redial] setting under  
fax transmission settings to set the machine to automatically redial the destination if the line is busy  
or an error occurs during transmission.  
The number of redial attempts is preset to two or three times, depending on the [Country] setting  
Immediate Transmission  
In this mode, the machine scans the original and faxes it simultaneously, without storing it in  
memory. This is convenient when you want to send an original quickly. In this mode, you can only  
specify one destination.  
1. Press the [Facsimile] key, and then press the [ ] or [ ] key.  
DAC520  
Alternatively, you can press the [ID Card Copy] key if [Shortcut to Function] under administrator  
settings is set to [Fax Immediate TX]. Press the key to switch to the [Immediate TX] menu. For  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Immediate TX], and then press the [OK] key.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sending a Fax  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Off], [On], or [Next Fax Only], and then press the [OK]  
key.  
For Memory Transmission, select [Off].  
For Immediate Transmission, select [On] or [Next Fax Only].  
4. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
Internet Fax Transmission  
You can send faxes over the Internet. When you send faxes to Internet Fax destinations, the machine  
converts scanned images to TIFF-F format files and send them as attachments to e-mail.  
• The level of security for Internet communications is low. It is recommended that you use the  
telephone network for confidential communications.  
• Internet Fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use a telephone line if the fax  
needs to be delivered in a timely manner.  
• This function is available for the Type 2 model only.  
• The Internet Fax function supported by this machine is compliant with ITU-T Recommendation T.37  
(Simple Mode).  
• To use the Internet Fax function, network settings must be configured properly. For details about  
• Internet Fax transmission may take some time before it starts. The machine needs a certain amount  
of time to convert data in memory prior to transmission.  
• Depending on e-mail environment conditions, you may not be able to fax large images.  
• The "Photo" resolution is not available for Internet Faxes. Faxes will be sent using "Detail" resolution  
if "Photo" resolution has been specified.  
• If the faxes are received on a computer, a viewer application needs to be installed in order to view  
the documents.  
Basic Operation for Sending a Fax  
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place  
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.  
DAC506  
2. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.  
3. Enter the fax number (up to 40 characters) using the number keys, or specify a  
destination using the One Touch buttons or Speed Dial function.  
• For details about specifying destinations using the One Touch buttons or Speed Dial function,  
• If the machine is connected to the telephone network through a PBX, make sure to enter the  
outside line access number specified in [PBX Access Number] before the fax number. For [PBX  
• To specify an Internet Fax destination, use the One Touch buttons or Speed Dial function.  
4. Press the [B&W Start] key.  
DAC518  
• Depending on the machine's settings, you may be prompted to enter the fax number again if  
you manually entered the fax number. In this case, re-enter the number within 60 seconds, if  
the fax numbers do not match, go back to Step 3. For details about [Fax Number  
• When using the exposure glass in Memory Transmission mode, you will be prompted to place  
another original. In this case, proceed to the next step.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Fax  
5. If you place the original on the exposure glass and have more originals to scan, press  
[Yes] within 60 seconds, place the next original on the exposure glass, and then press  
[OK]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.  
If you do not press [Yes] within 60 seconds, the machine will start to dial the destination.  
6. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the fax.  
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, pause, " ", " ", and space.  
• If necessary, insert a pause in a fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits  
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under  
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in a fax number. " " switches the dialing  
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.  
• You can specify multiple destinations and broadcast the fax you are sending. For sending a fax  
• When [Fax Number Confirmation] is set to [On], the machine prompts you to enter the fax number  
twice only when you dial the destination manually. Destinations specified using the One Touch  
buttons, Speed Dial function, or [Pause/Redial] key need not be confirmed. For details about [Fax  
• When in Memory Transmission mode, you can enable the [Auto Redial] setting under fax  
transmission settings to set the machine to automatically redial the destination if the line is busy or  
• When in Memory Transmission mode, the machine's memory may become full while scanning the  
originals. In this case, the screen prompts you to cancel the transmission or to send only the pages  
that have been scanned successfully.  
• If you specify an Internet Fax destination in Immediate Transmission mode, the mode switches to  
Memory Transmission mode temporarily.  
• If paper is jammed in the ADF, the jammed page has not been scanned properly. When the  
machine is in Immediate Transmission mode, resend the fax starting from the jammed page. When  
in Memory Transmission mode, scan the entire originals again. For details about removing paper  
• The machine can store up to 5 unsent fax jobs.  
Canceling a Transmission  
This section explains how to cancel a fax transmission.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Canceling a Transmission Before the Original Is Scanned  
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission before pressing the [B&W Start] key.  
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.  
DAC517  
Canceling a Transmission While the Original Is Being Scanned  
Use this procedure to cancel scanning or transmitting of the original while it is being scanned.  
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.  
DAC517  
Canceling a Transmission After the Original Is Scanned (While a Transmission Is in  
Progress)  
Use this procedure to delete a file that is being sent after the original is scanned.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Fax  
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key while "Transmitting..." is displayed on the display.  
DAC517  
• If you cancel a document while it is being sent, the transmission is halted as soon as you finish the  
cancellation procedure. However, some pages of the document may already have been sent and  
received at the other end.  
• If the transmission finishes while this procedure is being processed, the transmission is not canceled.  
Note that the transmission duration is short if an Internet Fax, e-mail transmission, or folder  
transmission is being executed.  
• If you cancel sending a fax while broadcasting, only the fax to the current destination is canceled.  
The fax will be sent to the subsequent destinations as normal. For details about sending a fax using  
Canceling a Transmission After the Original Is Scanned (Before a Transmission Starts)  
Use this procedure to delete a file stored in memory before its transmission starts.  
Use the following procedure to delete a file stored in memory (such as automatic redial) before its  
transmission starts.  
1. Confirm that the initial screen for Fax settings is shown on the display.  
2. Press [Del File].  
Del File  
RX File  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Delete Selected File] or [Delete All Files], and then press  
the [OK] key.  
• [Delete Selected File]  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
To delete a fax job, select the desired job, and then select [Yes]. Selecting [No] exits to the  
previous level of the menu tree without deleting the fax job.  
• [Delete All Files]  
To delete the fax jobs, select [Yes]. Selecting [No] exits to the previous level of the menu tree  
without deleting the fax job.  
4. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
• You cannot view files that are in the process of being sent.  
• If you specify a broadcast task, all the unsent destinations are canceled.  
Specifying the Fax Destination  
Other than entering the destination fax number using the number keys, you can specify destinations  
using the following functions:  
• One Touch buttons  
• Speed Dial  
• Broadcast function  
• Redial function  
• To prevent documents being sent to the wrong destination, you can configure the machine to  
prompt users twice for the destination or to display the entered destination prior to transmission. For  
Specifying the destination using the One Touch buttons  
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.  
DAC506  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending a Fax  
2. Press the One Touch button to which the desired Quick Dial entry is registered.  
Press the [Shift] key if you want to use Quick Dial entries Nos. 11 to 20 before pressing a One  
Touch button.  
DAC516  
• You can check the registered names and fax numbers by printing a report. For printing the Quick  
Specifying the destination using Speed Dial  
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.  
DAC506  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
2. Press the [Address Book] key.  
DAC513  
3. Press the [OK] key.  
If you want to search for a specific entry by its registration number or name, use the following  
procedure:  
• Searching by the registration number  
Press the [Address Book] key again, enter the number using the number keys.  
• Searching by the name  
Enter the first letters of the name using the number keys. Each time you enter a character, the  
display changes to show the matching name.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired Speed Dial entry, and then press the [OK]  
key.  
• The Address Book shows only the Speed Dial entries. Use the One Touch buttons to specify Quick  
Dial destinations.  
• You can check the registered names and fax numbers by printing a report. For printing the Speed  
Specifying the destination using the broadcast function  
You can send a fax to multiple destinations (up to 100 destinations) simultaneously.  
Faxes are sent to destinations in the order they were specified.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending a Fax  
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.  
DAC506  
2. Add a destination by using one of the following methods:  
• To add a Quick Dial destination, press a corresponding One Touch button.  
• To add a Speed Dial destination, press the [Address Book] key, select a destination, and then  
press the [OK] key.  
• To add a manually-specified destination, confirm that [No.key] is pressed, and then enter the  
destination fax number using the number keys.  
3. Press the [OK] key.  
Press [List] to see the list of destinations that have been added so far.  
Go back to Step 2 to add further destinations.  
• While specifying multiple destinations, you can press the [Clear/Stop] key to clear only the last-  
specified destination.  
• If you specify multiple destinations in Immediate Transmission mode, the mode switches to Memory  
Transmission mode temporarily.  
• If the destinations contain both normal fax destinations and Internet Fax destinations, the fax will be  
sent to the Internet Fax destinations first (Type 2 model only).  
• While broadcasting, pressing the [Clear/Stop] key cancels the fax to the current destination only.  
Specifying the destination using the redial function  
You can specify the last used destination as the destination for the current job.  
This function saves time when you are sending to the same destination repeatedly, as you do not have to  
enter the destination each time.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.  
DAC506  
2. Press the [Pause/Redial] key.  
DAC515  
• To cancel sending a fax, press the [Clear/Stop] key.  
Useful Sending Functions  
You can check the status of the other party's machine easily before sending a fax by using the On Hook  
Dial function. Using an extra telephone, you can talk and send a fax in one call.  
• This function is available in Immediate Transmission mode only.  
• This function is not available with Internet Fax.  
Sending a fax using On Hook Dial  
The On Hook Dial function allows you to check the destination's status while listening to the tone from the  
internal speaker. This function is useful when you want to ensure that the fax will be received.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending a Fax  
• The On Hook Dial function cannot be used when [Fax Number Confirmation] under administrator  
settings is enabled.  
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.  
2. Press the [Facsimile] key.  
DAC506  
3. Press the [On Hook Dial] key.  
DAC514  
"On Hook" appears on the screen.  
4. Specify the destination using the number keys.  
5. If you hear a high pitched tone, press the [B&W Start] key.  
DAC518  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
6. Press [TX], and then press the [B&W Start] key.  
Sending a fax after a conversation  
An external telephone allows you to send a fax after finishing your conversation without having to  
disconnect and redial. This function is useful when you want to ensure that the fax has been received.  
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.  
2. Press the [Facsimile] key.  
DAC506  
3. Pick up the handset of the external telephone.  
4. Specify the destination using the external telephone.  
5. When the other party answers, ask them to press their fax start button.  
6. If you hear a high pitched tone, press the [B&W Start] key.  
DAC518  
7. Press [TX], and then press the [B&W Start] key.  
8. Replace the handset.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Fax  
Specifying the Scan Settings  
Adjusting image density  
This section explains how to adjust image density for the current job.  
There are three image density levels. The darker the density level, the darker the printout.  
1. Press the [Density] key.  
DAC511  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired density level, and then press the [OK] key.  
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always scan with a specific density level.  
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:  
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while  
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.  
• When the machine's mode is changed.  
• When the power is turned off.  
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.  
Specifying the resolution  
This section explains how to specify the scan resolution for the current job.  
There are three resolution settings:  
Standard  
Select this when the original is a printed or typewritten document with normal-sized characters.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Detail  
Select this when the original is a document with small print.  
Photo  
Select this when the original contains images such as photographs or shaded drawings.  
1. Press the [Image Quality] key.  
DAC510  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired resolution setting, and then press the [OK]  
key.  
• You can change the machine's default [Resolution] setting to always scan with a specific resolution  
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:  
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while  
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.  
• When the machine's mode is changed.  
• When the power is turned off.  
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)  
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-  
Fax)  
This section explains how to use the fax function of the machine from a computer.  
You can send a document directly from a computer through this machine to another fax machine,  
without printing the document.  
• This function is supported by Windows XP/Vista/7/8, and Windows Server 2003/2003  
R2/2008/2008 R2/2012. Mac OS X does not support this function.  
Basic Operation for Sending Faxes from a Computer  
This section describes the basic operation for sending faxes from a computer.  
You can select a destination from the LAN-Fax address book or enter a fax number manually. You can  
send faxes to up to 100 destinations at once.  
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 7.  
• Before sending a fax, the machine stores all the fax data in memory. If the machine's memory  
becomes full while storing this data, the fax transmission will be canceled. If this happens, lower the  
resolution or reduce the number of pages and try again.  
1. Open the file you want to send.  
2. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].  
3. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click [Print].  
4. Specify a destination.  
• To specify a destination from the LAN-Fax address book:  
Select a destination from [User List:], and then click [Add to List].  
Repeat this step to add more destinations.  
• To enter a fax number directly:  
Click the [Specify Destination] tab, and enter a fax number (up to 40 digits) in [Fax Number:],  
and then click [Add to List].  
Repeat this step to add more destinations.  
5. To attach a cover sheet, click [Edit Cover Sheet] on the [Specify Destination] tab, and then  
select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check box.  
Edit the cover sheet as necessary, and then click [OK].  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
6. Click [Send].  
• For details, see the LAN-Fax driver Help.  
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, "P" (pause), " ", " ", "-", and space.  
• If necessary, insert a pause in a fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits  
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under  
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in a fax number. " " switches the dialing  
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.  
• To delete an entered destination, select the destination in the [Destination List:], and then click  
[Delete from List].  
• You can register the fax number you entered in the [Specify Destination] tab in the LAN-Fax  
Address Book. Click [Save to Address Book] to open the dialog box for registering a destination.  
• From the [View:] list, you can select the types of destinations to display.  
• [All]: Displays all destinations.  
• [Group]: Displays groups only.  
• [User]: Displays individual destinations only.  
• If sending faxes via LAN-Fax is restricted, you must enter a user code in the LAN-Fax driver's  
Canceling a fax  
You can cancel sending a fax using either the machine's control panel or your computer, depending on  
the status of the job.  
Canceling while the machine is receiving a fax from the computer  
If the machine is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to cancel the fax of another user.  
1. Double-click the printer icon on the task bar of your computer.  
2. Select the print job you want to cancel, click the [Document] menu, and then click  
[Cancel].  
Canceling while sending a fax  
Cancel the fax using the control panel.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)  
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.  
DAC506  
2. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.  
DAC517  
Configuring Transmission Settings  
This section explains how to configure transmission settings in the LAN-Fax driver's properties.  
Properties are set separately for each application.  
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].  
2. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click a button such as [Preferences].  
LAN-Fax driver properties dialog box appears.  
3. Click the [Setup] tab.  
4. Configure settings as necessary, and then click [OK].  
For details about the settings, see the LAN-Fax driver Help.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Configuring the LAN-Fax Address Book  
This section describes the LAN-Fax address book. Configure the LAN-Fax address book on the  
computer. The LAN-Fax address book allows you to specify LAN-Fax destinations quickly and easily.  
The LAN-Fax address book can contain up to 1000 entries, including individual destinations and  
groups of destinations.  
• You can configure separate LAN-Fax Address Books for each user account on your computer.  
• You can import and export the LAN-Fax Address Book as required.  
Opening the LAN-Fax address book  
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].  
2. Right-click the LAN-Fax driver icon, and then click [Printing preferences].  
3. Click the [Address Book] tab.  
Registering destinations  
1. Open the LAN-Fax address book, and then click [Add User].  
2. Enter the destination information.  
You must enter a contact name and fax number.  
3. Click [OK].  
Modifying destinations  
1. Open the LAN-Fax address Book, select the destination you want to modify from the  
[User List:], and then click [Edit].  
2. Modify information as necessary, and then click [OK].  
Click [Save as new User] if you want to register a new destination with similar information. This is  
useful when you want to register a series of destinations that contain similar information. To close  
the dialog box without modifying the original destination, click [Cancel].  
Registering groups  
1. Open the LAN-Fax address Book, and then click [Add Group].  
2. Enter the group name in [Group Name].  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)  
3. Select the destination you want to include in the group from [User List:], and then click  
[Add].  
4. Click [OK]  
• A group must contain at least one destination.  
• A group name must be specified for a group. No two groups can have the same group name.  
• A single destination can be included in more than one group.  
Modifying groups  
1. Open the LAN-Fax address Book, select the group you want to modify from the [User  
List:], and then click [Edit].  
2. To add a destination to the group, select the destination you want to add from [User List:]  
and click [Add].  
3. To delete a destination from the group, select the destination you want to delete from [List  
of Group Members:], and then click [Delete from List].  
4. Click [OK].  
• A message appears if the name you specified already exists in the LAN-Fax Address Book. Click  
[OK] and register it under a different name.  
Deleting individual destinations or groups  
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, select the destination you want to delete from [User  
List:], and then click [Delete].  
A confirmation message appears.  
2. Click [Yes].  
• A destination is automatically deleted from a group if that destination is deleted from the LAN-Fax  
Address Book. If you are deleting the last destination from a group, a message asking you to  
confirm the deletion appears. Click [OK] if you want to delete the group.  
• Deleting a group does not delete the destinations it contains from the LAN-Fax Address Book.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Exporting/Importing LAN-Fax Address Book data  
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another  
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly  
Exporting LAN-Fax Address Book data  
LAN-Fax Address Book data can be exported to a file in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.  
Follow this procedure to export LAN-Fax Address Book data.  
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, and then click [Export].  
2. Navigate to the location to save the LAN-Fax Address Book data, specify a name for  
the file, and then click [Save].  
Importing LAN-Fax Address Book data  
LAN-Fax Address Book data can be imported from files in CSV format. You can import address  
book data from other applications if the data is saved as a CSV file.  
Follow this procedure to import LAN-Fax Address Book data. To import address book data from  
other applications, you must select the appropriate items to import.  
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, and then click [Import].  
2. Select the file containing the address book data, and then click [Open].  
A dialog box for selecting the items to import appears.  
3. For each field, select an appropriate item from the list.  
Select [*empty*] for fields for which there is no data to import. Note that [*empty*] cannot  
be selected for [Name] and [Fax].  
4. Click [OK].  
For details about the settings, see the LAN-Fax driver Help.  
• CSV files are exported using Unicode encoding.  
• LAN-Fax Address Book data can be imported from CSV files whose character encoding is Unicode  
or ASCII.  
• Group data cannot be exported or imported.  
• Up to 1000 destinations can be registered in the LAN-Fax Address Book. If this limit is exceeded  
during importing, the remaining destinations will not be imported.  
Editing a Fax Cover Sheet  
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)  
2. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click [Print].  
3. Click the [Specify Destination] tab, and then click [Edit Cover Sheet].  
4. Configure settings as necessary, and then click [Print].  
For details about the settings, see the LAN-Fax driver Help.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Receiving a Fax  
• When receiving an important fax, we recommend you confirm the contents of the received fax with  
the sender.  
• The machine may not be able to receive faxes when the amount of free memory space is low.  
• An external telephone is required to use this machine as a telephone.  
• Only A4, Letter, or Legal size paper can be used for printing faxes.  
Selecting Reception Mode  
The reception modes are as follows:  
When using the machine only as a fax machine  
Select the following mode when no external telephone or telephone answering device is  
connected:  
• Fax Only mode (auto reception)  
In this mode, the machine is used only as a fax machine and receives faxes automatically.  
When using the machine with an external device  
Select one of the following modes when an external telephone or telephone answering device is  
connected:  
• FAX/TEL Manual mode (manual reception)  
In this mode, you must answer calls with an external telephone. If a call is a fax call, you must  
start the fax reception manually.  
• Fax Only mode (auto reception)  
In this mode, the machine automatically answers all incoming calls in fax reception mode.  
• FAX/TEL Automatic mode (auto reception)  
In this mode, you can answer phone calls with an external telephone and receive faxes  
automatically.  
• FAX/TAD mode (auto reception)  
In this mode, you can use the machine with an external telephone answering device.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Receiving a Fax  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Fax Features], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Reception Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Switch Reception Mode], and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] key to select the desired reception mode, and then press the  
[OK] key.  
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Manual mode  
1. Pick up the handset of the external telephone to answer the call.  
A normal telephone call starts.  
2. When you hear a fax calling tone or no sound, press the [Facsimile] key, and then press  
the [B&W Start] key.  
3. Press [RX].  
4. Press the [B&W Start] key.  
"Receiving..." appears on the display.  
5. Replace the handset.  
Receiving a fax in Fax Only mode  
When the reception mode is set to Fax Only mode, the machine automatically answers all incoming  
calls in fax reception mode.  
• You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering a call in the [Number of  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
• If you answer a call with the external telephone while the machine is ringing, a normal telephone  
call starts. If you hear a fax calling tone or no sound, receive the fax manually. To receive the fax  
Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Automatic mode  
When the reception mode is set to FAX/TEL Automatic mode, the machine receives a fax automatically  
if the incoming call is a fax call and rings when it receives voice calls.  
1. When there is an incoming call, the machine tries to detect a fax calling tone for five  
seconds.  
If a fax calling tone is detected, the machine starts to receive the fax automatically.  
2. If a fax calling tone is not detected, the machine starts to ring, and continues to try to  
detect a fax calling tone for the period of time specified in RX Mode Auto Switch Time  
under Fax Features.  
• If a fax calling tone is detected, or if you do not pick up the handset, the machine starts to  
receive the fax automatically.  
• To start a normal telephone call, pick up the handset, press the [Facsimile] key, and then press  
the [Clear/Stop] key. If you hear a fax calling tone or no sound, receive the fax manually. For  
• If you pick up the handset but the time specified in [RX Mode Auto Switch Time] passes before  
a normal telephone call starts, the machine starts to receive the fax automatically. For details  
• After you pick up the handset to answer a call, make sure to press the [Facsimile] key to activate  
fax mode before pressing the [Clear/Stop] key. If the machine is not in fax mode, pressing the  
[Clear/Stop] key will not let you start a normal telephone call.  
Receiving a fax in FAX/TAD mode  
When the reception mode is set to FAX/TAD mode, the external telephone answering device answers  
and records messages when the machine receives telephone calls. If the incoming call is a fax call, the  
machine receives the fax automatically.  
1. When there is an incoming call, the external telephone answering device rings.  
If the external telephone answering device does not answer, the machine starts to receive the fax  
automatically.  
If you answer a call with the external telephone while the machine is ringing, a normal telephone  
call starts. If you hear a fax calling tone, wait until "Receiving..." appears on the display. The  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving a Fax  
machine starts to receive faxes. If the message "Receiving..." does not appear, receive the fax  
2. If the external telephone answering device answers, the machine monitors silence on the  
line for 30 seconds (silence detection).  
• If a fax calling tone or no sound is detected, the machine starts to receive the fax  
automatically.  
• If a voice is detected, a normal telephone call starts. The external telephone answering device  
records messages.  
• You can manually receive a fax during silence detection. To receive the fax manually, see  
• Silence detection does not terminate for 30 seconds even if the external telephone answering  
device goes on-hook, unless you press the [Clear/Stop] key and disconnect the call.  
Receiving an Internet Fax  
You can set the machine to periodically check for e-mails (Internet Faxes) and receive them  
automatically, or you can manually check and receive them.  
• Specify the e-mail address of this machine for receiving Internet Faxes in User Account under POP3  
settings of Web Image Monitor.  
• This machine may not be able to receive e-mails in HTML format.  
• This function is available for the Type 2 model only.  
Automatic reception  
When [Automatic POP] under Internet Fax settings of Web Image Monitor is enabled, the machine  
periodically connects to the POP3 server, as specified in [POP Interval (minutes)], to check for new  
e-mails. The machine will download them if there are any.  
Manual reception  
When [Automatic POP] is disabled, use the control panel to manually connect to the POP3 server  
and check for new e-mails.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Receiving a fax using the control panel  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to select [Fax Features], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to select [Reception Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to select [Manual POP], and then press the [OK] key.  
5. In the confirmation screen, press [Yes].  
The machine checks for new e-mails and downloads them if there is any.  
Receiving a fax using Web Image Monitor  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [Network Settings].  
3. Click the [Internet Fax] tab.  
4. Select "Automatic POP" to [Active] or [Inactive].  
[Active]: Automatic reception  
[Inactive]: Manual reception  
5. Click [OK].  
6. Close the Web browser.  
• If the e-mail reception fails and [Error Notification E-mail] under Internet Fax settings of Web Image  
Monitor is enabled, an error notification e-mail will be sent to the original sender. For details about  
• If [Error Notification E-mail] is disabled or the error notification e-mail failed, the machine will print  
out an error report.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving a Fax  
Forwarding or Storing Faxes in Memory  
To prevent unauthorized users from seeing sensitive faxes, you can set the machine to forward received  
faxes to a preset destination, or store them in memory without printing them out.  
• This function is available for the Type 2 model only.  
• The table below shows what happens after forwarding succeeds or fails depending on the  
machine’s configuration.  
Forwarding  
[Print  
[Print  
Results  
Forwarded Received File]  
File]  
Success  
Success  
Success  
Failure  
Failure  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
Not  
applicable  
The machine deletes the fax from memory.  
On  
The machine prints out the fax and deletes it  
from memory.  
Off  
The machine stores the fax in memory for later  
manual printing.  
Not  
applicable  
The machine prints out a forwarding failure  
report and deletes the fax from memory.  
On  
The machine prints out a forwarding failure  
report, prints out the fax, and then deletes it  
from memory.  
Failure  
On  
Off  
The machine prints out a forwarding failure  
report and stores the fax in memory for later  
manual printing.  
• If the machine is unable to print out a fax due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a  
paper jam, the fax will remain in memory and the Fax Received indicator will flash. The remaining  
pages will start printing as soon as the problem is resolved.  
• The number of forwarding attempts and the attempt interval time can be specified using Web  
Image Monitor. For details about the forwarding destination, forwarding trials and interval settings,  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Forwarding settings  
To specify the forwarding conditions for received faxes, configure the machine as follows:  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Fax Features], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Reception Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Reception File Setting], and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Forward], and then press the [OK] key.  
To send e-mail notifications after faxes are forwarded, proceed to Step 6. If not, proceed to Step  
8.  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Notify Forward Status], and then press the [OK] key.  
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Active], and then press the [OK] key.  
• [Active]: Send an e-mail notification after forwarding. E-mail notification destination depends  
on how the forwarding destination is configured.  
• [Inactive]: An e-mail notification is not sent.  
8. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Receiving a Fax  
Configuring the forwarding conditions  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Fax Features], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Reception Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Print Forwarded File], and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [On] or [Off], and then press the [OK] key.  
• [On]: Store the faxes in memory for printing.  
• [Off]: Delete the faxes from memory.  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Print Received File], and then press the [OK] key.  
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [On] or [Off], and then press the [OK] key.  
• [On]: Automatically print out the received faxes and delete from memory.  
• [Off]: Store the received faxes in memory for later manual printing. To manually print out  
If you select [On], proceed to the next step. If you select [Off], proceed to Step 9.  
8. Enter the start time and the end time, and press the [OK] key.  
The machine prints out the received faxes and deletes them from memory within the specified time.  
9. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
Specifying the forwarding destination using Web Image Monitor  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [System Settings].  
3. Click the [Fax] tab.  
4. Specify the forwarding destination in [Forwarding Destination].  
[E-mail Address]: Enter a destination e-mail address.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
[Scan Destination]: Select a scan destination as a forwarding destination.  
5. Click [OK].  
6. Close the Web browser.  
Configuring the storing conditions  
To specify the storing conditions for received faxes, configure the machine as follows:  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Fax Features], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Reception Settings], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Reception File Setting], and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Print], and then press the [OK] key.  
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Print Received File], and then press the [OK] key.  
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [On] or [Off], and then press the [OK] key.  
• [On]: Automatically print out the received faxes and delete from memory.  
• [Off]: Store the received faxes in memory for later manual printing. To manually print out  
If you select [On], proceed to the next step. If you select [Off], proceed to Step 9.  
8. Enter the start time and the end time.  
The machine prints out the received faxes and delete from memory within the specified time.  
9. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [ID Card Copy] key if [Shortcut to Function] under administrator  
settings is set to [Fax Auto Print Setting]. Press the key to switch to the [Print Received File] menu. For  
• When the fax is successfully printed out, it will be deleted from memory.  
• If the machine is unable to print out a fax due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a  
paper jam, the fax will remain in memory and the Fax Received indicator will flash. The remaining  
pages will start printing as soon as the problem is resolved.  
Printing Out Faxes Stored in Memory  
This section explains how to print out received faxes stored in the machine’s memory.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving a Fax  
When the Fax Received indicator is lit, there is a fax stored in machine’s memory. Follow the procedure  
below to print the fax.  
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.  
DAC506  
2. Press [RX File].  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to select [On], and then press the [OK] key.  
The machine prints out the stored fax and deletes it from memory.  
• Selecting [On] here will enable [Print Received File] under fax feature settings. If you do not want to  
• If tray 2 is installed, you can select which tray to feed paper from in [Select Paper Tray] under fax  
feature settings. If you set the machine to switch between Tray 1 and 2 automatically in this setting,  
you can also specify the tray the machine uses first in [Paper Tray Priority] under tray paper  
• If the Fax Received indicator is flashing, there is a received fax in the machine's memory that could  
not be printed out due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a paper jam. The printing  
will start as soon as the problem is resolved.  
Receiving or Rejecting Faxes from Special Senders  
You can set the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from the registered Special Senders. This helps  
you screen out unwanted documents, such as junk faxes, and prevents the wasting of fax paper.  
To use this function, you must first register Special Senders using Web Image Monitor, and then select  
whether to accept or reject faxes from them.  
• This function is not available with Internet Fax.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Registering the Special Senders  
This section explains how to register Special Senders.  
Up to 30 Special Senders can be registered.  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [Special Sender].  
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [Special Sender].  
4. Select the Special Sender number from the list (1 to 30).  
5. Enter the Special Sender’s fax number (up to 20 characters).  
6. Enter the administrator password if required.  
7. Click [OK].  
8. Close the Web browser.  
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, , and space.  
Limiting the incoming faxes  
This section explains how to set the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from the programmed  
Special Senders.  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving a Fax  
2. Click [System Settings].  
3. Click the [Fax] tab.  
4. For [Authorized Reception], click [Active].  
5. For [Receive Conditions], click [Special Sender] or [Other Than Special Sender].  
• Special Sender  
Select this to receive faxes from the Special Senders and reject faxes from all other senders.  
• Other Than Special Sender  
Select this to reject faxes from the Special Senders and receive faxes from all other senders.  
6. Enter the administrator password if required.  
7. Click [OK].  
8. Close the Web browser.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax  
Lists/Reports Related to Fax  
The lists and reports related to the fax function are as follow:  
• Configuration Page  
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.  
• Fax Journal  
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs.  
• TX/RX Standby File List  
Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed, sent, or forwarded.  
• Quick Dial Dest. List  
Prints a list of scan and fax Quick Dial entries.  
• Fax Speed Dial Dest. List  
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.  
• Sort by Speed Dial No.  
Prints the list with the entries sorted by Speed Dial registration number.  
• Sort by Name  
Prints the list with the entries sorted by name.  
• Special Sender List  
Prints a list of fax Special Senders.  
• Power Failure Report  
Prints a report when the machine's power has been interrupted while sending or receiving a fax, or  
images stored in the machine's memory have been lost due to the machine being turned off for a  
prolonged period of time.  
• Repots will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Configuring the Machine Using the  
Control Panel  
Basic Operation  
There are two main ways to access the machine settings:  
• Press the [User Tools] key to access the System or Network settings.  
• Press the [ ] or [ ] key to access the Copy, Scan, or Fax settings.  
1. If you want to configure the machine's system settings, press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
Otherwise, press the [ ] or [ ] key while "Ready" is displayed on the initial screen of the Copy,  
Scan, and Fax settings.  
DAC520  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the settings you want to use.  
If you select [Address Book], [Network Settings], or [Admin. Tools] menu, you might be requested  
to enter a password. Enter the four-digit password, and then press the [OK] key. For details about  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
3. To confirm setting items and values displayed, press the [OK] key.  
4. To go back to the previous item, press the [Escape] key.  
• To return to the initial screen, press the [Escape] key the same amount of times as the number of  
selected items, or press the [User Tools] key once.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Chart  
Menu Chart  
This section lists the parameters included in each menu.  
• Some items might not appear depending on the model type or machine's configuration.  
• Some items can also be configured using Web Image Monitor.  
Copier Features ([ ] [ ] key setting)  
[Select Paper], [Sort], [Original Type], [Density], [Reduce/Enlarge], [Color Adjustment], [Duplex/  
Combine] , [B&W Copy Scan Settings]  
Scan Settings ([ ] [ ] key setting)  
[Scan Size], [B&W Scanning Mode], [Max. E-mail Size], [Density], [Resolution], [Compression  
(Color)], [Limitless Scan], [Single/ Multi Page]  
Fax TX Settings ([ ] [ ] key setting)  
[Immediate TX], [Resolution], [Density], [Pause Time], [Auto Redial], [Print Fax Header]  
Fax Features ([User Tools] key setting)  
[Reception Settings], [Select Paper Tray], [Delete TX Standby File], [Communication Settings],  
[Report Print Settings]  
Address Book ([User Tools] key setting)  
[Quick Dial Dest.], [Fax Speed Dial Dest.]  
System Settings ([User Tools] key setting)  
[Adjust Sound Volume], [I/O Timeout], [Auto Continue], [Toner Saving], [Supplies Status], [Anti-  
Humidity Level], [Color Registration], [Auto Cleaning], [B&W Print Priority], [Notify: Toner Almost  
Empty]  
Tray Paper Settings ([User Tools] key setting)  
[Paper Size: Tray 1], [Paper Size: Tray 2], [Paper Size: Bypass Tray], [Paper Type: Tray 1], [Paper  
Type: Tray 2], [Paper Type: Bypass Tray], [Tray1 Priority], [Bypass Tray Priority], [Paper Tray  
Priority]  
Network Settings ([User Tools] key setting)  
[Ethernet], [Wi-Fi Configuration], [IPv4 Configuration], [IPv6 Configuration]  
Print List/Report ([User Tools] key setting)  
[Configuration Page], [Fax Journal], [TX/RX Standby File List], [Quick Dial Dest. List], [Fax Speed  
Dial Dest. List], [Scanner Dest. List], [Scanner Journal], [Maintenance Page], [Special Sender List]  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Admin. Tools ([User Tools] key setting)  
[Set Date/Time], [Program Fax Information], [Dial/Push Phone], [PSTN / PBX], [PBX Access  
Number], [Function Priority], [System Auto Reset Timer], [Energy Saver Mode], [Language],  
[Country], [Reset Settings], [Shortcut to Function], [PCL6 Mode], [Admin. Tools Lock], [IPsec], [Fax  
Number Confirmation], [Save Scn Data to USB]  
Printer Features ([User Tools] key setting)  
[List/Test Print], [System], [PCL Menu], [PS Menu]  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copier Features Settings  
Copier Features Settings  
Select Paper  
Specifies the paper size used for printing copies.  
When a tray is selected, the machine prints from that tray only.  
When a paper size is selected, the machine prints from the trays that contain the paper of the  
specified size, except the bypass tray. If Tray 1 and tray 2 both contain the paper of the specified  
size, the machine starts to print from the tray specified as the priority tray in [Paper Tray Priority]  
under tray paper settings. If that tray runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the  
other tray to continue printing.  
If Tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1] and [Bypass Tray] appear.  
Default: [Tray 1]  
• Tray 1  
• Tray 2  
• Bypass Tray  
• A4  
• 8 1/2 × 11  
Sort  
Configures the machine to sort the output pages into sets when making multiple copies of a multi-  
page document (P1, P2, P1, P2...).  
Default: [Off]  
• On  
• Off  
Original Type  
Specifies the content of originals, to optimize copy quality.  
Default: [Mixed]  
• Mixed  
Select this when the original contains both text and photographs or pictures.  
• Text  
Select this when the original contains only text and no photographs or pictures.  
• Photo  
Select this when the original contains photographs or pictures. Use this mode for the following  
types of original:  
• Photographs  
• Pages that are entirely or mainly photographs or pictures, such as magazine pages.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Density  
Specifies the image density for photocopying.  
Increase the level (black squares) to increase the density.  
Default: The default setting is the middle of 5 adjustment levels.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Specifies the percentage by which copies are enlarged or reduced.  
Default: [100%]  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
50%, 71%, 82%, 93%, 100%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%  
(mainly North America)  
50%, 65%, 78%, 93%, 100%, 129%, 155%, 200%, 400%  
• ID Card Copy  
Sets the machine to copy the front and back sides of an ID card, or other small document,  
onto the front of a single sheet of paper.  
• Zoom 25-400%  
Color Adjustment  
Specify the color balance of red, green and blue.  
Increase the level (black squares) to increase the color brightness.  
Default: The default setting is the middle of 5 adjustment levels.  
Duplex/Combine  
Specifies combined copying. Select a copy mode according to your original and how you want  
the printed copies to appear. In [Manual 2 Sided Scan Mode], use the exposure glass to copy the  
Note that enabling combined copying automatically disables ID card copying.  
Default: [Off]  
• Off  
• 1Sd 2Orig->Comb 2on1 1Sd  
Copy will be made on 1 side, on which 2 pages of 1-sided original will be printed.  
• Portrait  
• Landscape  
• 1Sd 4Orig->Comb 4on1 1Sd  
Copy will be made on 1 side, on which 4 pages of 1-sided original will be printed.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copier Features Settings  
• Portrait: L to R  
• Portrait: T to B  
• Landscape: L to R  
• Landscape: T to B  
• 1 Sided Orig->2 Sided Copy  
Copies two 1-sided pages on one 2-sided page.  
• Portrait: T to T  
• Portrait: T to B  
• Landscape: T to T  
• Landscape: T to B  
• 1Sd 4Orig->Comb 2on1 2Sd  
Copies four 1-sided pages on two 2-sided pages.  
• Portrait: T to T  
• Portrait: T to B  
• Landscape: T to T  
• Landscape: T to B  
• 1Sd 8Orig->Comb 4on1 2Sd  
Copies eight 1-sided pages on four 2-sided pages.  
• Portrait: L to R, T to T  
• Portrait: L to R, T to B  
• Portrait: T to B, T to T  
• Portrait: T to B, T to B  
• Landscape: L to R, T to T  
• Landscape: L to R, T to B  
• Landscape: T to B, T to T  
• Landscape: T to B, T to B  
• 2Sd 1Orig->Comb 2on1 1Sd  
Copies one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet.  
• Portrait: T to T  
• Portrait: T to B  
• Landscape: T to T  
• Landscape: T to B  
• 2Sd 2Orig->Comb 4on1 1Sd  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Copies two 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.  
• Portrait: L to R, T to T  
• Portrait: L to R, T to B  
• Portrait: T to B, T to T  
• Portrait: T to B, T to B  
• Landscape: L to R, T to T  
• Landscape: L to R, T to B  
• Landscape: T to B, T to T  
• Landscape: T to B, T to B  
• 2 Sided Orig->2 Sided Copy  
Makes 2-sided copies of 2-sided originals.  
• 2Sd 2Orig->Comb 2on1 2Sd  
Copies two 2-sided originals to one sheet with two pages per side.  
• Portrait: T to T  
• Portrait: T to B  
• Landscape: T to T  
• Landscape: T to B  
• 2Sd 4Orig->Comb 4on1 2Sd  
Copies four 2-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.  
• Portrait: L to R, T to T  
• Portrait: L to R, T to B  
• Portrait: T to B, T to T  
• Portrait: T to B, T to B  
• Landscape: L to R, T to T  
• Landscape: L to R, T to B  
• Landscape: T to B, T to T  
• Landscape: T to B, T to B  
• Manual 2 Sided Scan Mode  
Select this mode to make 2-sided copies using the exposure glass.  
B&W Copy Scan Settings  
Specify an image quality for black-and-white printing. The scanning speed using [Fine] is slower  
than that using [Standard].  
Default: [Standard]  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copier Features Settings  
• Standard  
• Fine  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Scanner Features Settings  
Scan Size  
Specifies the scanning size according to the size of the original.  
Default:  
11]  
(mainly Europe and Asia) [A4]  
(mainly North America) [8 1/2 ×  
• 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 5 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2, A4, B5, A5, Custom Size  
B&W Scanning Mode  
Specifies the scanning mode for black-and-white scanning using the control panel.  
Default: [Halftone]  
• Halftone  
The machine creates 1-bit black-and-white images. Images contain only black and white  
colors.  
• Gray Scale  
The machine creates 8-bit black-and-white images. Images contain black and white, and  
intermediate gray colors.  
Max. E-mail Size  
Specifies the maximum size of a file that can be sent by e-mail.  
Default: [1 MB]  
• 1 MB  
• 2 MB  
• 3 MB  
• 4 MB  
• 5 MB  
• No Limit  
Density  
Specifies the image density for scanning originals.  
Increase the level (black squares) to increase the density.  
Default: The default setting is the middle of 5 adjustment levels.  
Resolution  
Specifies the resolution for scanning the original.  
Default: [300 × 300dpi]  
• 100 × 100dpi  
• 150 × 150dpi  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanner Features Settings  
• 200 × 200dpi  
• 300 × 300dpi  
• 400 × 400dpi  
• 600 × 600dpi  
Compression (Color)  
Specifies the color compression ratio for JPEG files. The lower the compression ratio, the higher the  
quality but greater the file size.  
Default: [Medium]  
• Low  
• Medium  
• High  
Limitless Scan  
Sets the machine to request next originals when scanning with the exposure glass.  
Default: [Off]  
• Off  
• On  
Single/ Multi Page  
Specifies whether to create a multi-page file containing all pages or separate single-page files  
when scanning multiple pages.  
Note that a scanned file can contain multiple pages only when the file format is PDF or TIFF. If the  
file format is JPEG, a single-page file is created for each scanned page.  
Default: [Multi-page]  
• Multi-page  
A multi-page file containing all pages is created.  
• Single Page  
A single-page file is created for each page.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Fax Transmission Features Settings  
Immediate TX  
Sets the machine to send a fax immediately when the original is scanned.  
Default: [Off]  
• Off  
Select this when using Memory Transmission.  
• On  
Select this when using Immediate Transmission.  
• Next Fax Only  
Select this when using Immediate Transmission for the next transmission only.  
Resolution  
Specifies the resolution to use for scanning originals.  
"Photo" resolution is not available for Internet Faxes. Faxes will be sent using "Detail" resolution if  
"Photo" resolution has been specified.  
Default: [Standard]  
• Standard  
Select this when the original is a printed or typewritten document with normal-sized  
characters.  
• Detail  
Select this when the original is a document with small print.  
• Photo  
Select this when the original contains images such as photographs or shaded drawings.  
Density  
Specifies the image density to use for scanning originals.  
Default: [Normal]  
• Light  
• Normal  
• Dark  
Pause Time  
Specifies the length of pause time when a pause is inserted between the digits of a fax number.  
Default: 3 seconds  
• 1 to 15 seconds  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fax Transmission Features Settings  
Auto Redial  
Sets the machine to redial the fax destination automatically when the line is busy or a transmission  
error occurs, if the machine is in Memory Transmission mode. The number of redial attempts is  
preset to two or three times, depending on the [Country] setting under [Admin. Tools], in five-minute  
intervals.  
Default: [On]  
• Off  
• On  
Print Fax Header  
Sets the machine to add a header to every fax you send. The header includes the current date and  
time, user fax name and fax number of the machine, job ID, and page information.  
Default: [On]  
• Off  
• On  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Fax Features Settings  
Reception Settings  
Specifies the settings for receiving a fax.  
• Switch Reception Mode  
Specifies the reception mode.  
Default: [Fax Only]  
• Fax Only  
The machine automatically answers all incoming calls in fax reception mode.  
• FAX/TEL(Mnl.)  
The machine rings when it receives incoming calls. The machine receives faxes only  
when you manually receive faxes.  
• FAX/TAD  
The machine receives faxes automatically when a fax call is received. Otherwise, the  
connected telephone answering device answers the call.  
• FAX/TEL(Auto)  
The machine receives faxes automatically when a fax call is received. Otherwise, the  
machine starts to ring.  
• Auto Reduction  
Sets the machine to reduce the size of a received fax if it is too large to print on a single sheet  
of paper.  
Note that the machine only reduces the size down to 74%. If further reduction is required to fit  
the fax on a single sheet, it will be printed on separate sheets without being reduced.  
Default: [On]  
(Default may be [Off] depending on the [Country] setting under [Admin. Tools].)  
• Off  
• On  
• Number of Rings  
Specifies the number of times the machine rings before it starts to receive faxes in Fax Only  
mode.  
Default: 3 times  
• 3 to 5 times, in increments of 1  
• RX Mode Auto Switch Time  
Specifies the length of time the machine tries to detect the fax calling tone in FAX/TEL  
Automatic mode.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fax Features Settings  
Default: 15 seconds  
• 5 to 99 seconds, 1 second increments  
• Authorized Reception  
Sets the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from the programmed Special Senders. This  
helps you screen out unwanted documents, such as junk faxes, and prevents the wasting of  
fax paper.  
Default: [Inactive]  
• Active  
• Inactive  
• Auth.RX: Receive Conditions  
Specifies whether to receive or reject faxes from the programmed Special Senders.  
This setting is available when [Authorized Reception] is enabled.  
Default: [Special Sender]  
• Special Sender  
Receive faxes from the Special Senders and reject faxes from all other senders.  
• Other Than Special Sender  
Reject faxes from the Special Senders and receive faxes from all other senders.  
• Reception File Setting  
Sets the machine to store received faxes into memory for printing or forward them to a preset  
destination.  
This setting appears only for the Type 2 model.  
Default: [Print]  
• Print  
• Forward  
• Print Received File  
Sets the machine to automatically print the faxes received into memory or store them for later  
manual printing.  
This setting appears only for the Type 2 model.  
Default: [On]  
• On  
Automatically print out the received faxes and delete from memory.  
The machine prints out the received faxes and deletes them from memory within the  
specified time.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
• Off  
Store the received faxes in memory for manual printing.  
• Print Forwarded File  
Sets the machine to store the faxes in memory for printing or delete them after forwarding.  
This setting appears only for the Type 2 model.  
Default: [Off]  
• On  
Store the faxes in memory for printing after forwarding.  
• Off  
Delete the faxes from memory after forwarding.  
• Notify Forward Status  
Sets the machine to send e-mail notifications after faxes are forwarded. The e-mail notification  
destination depends on how the forwarding destination is configured using Web Image  
This setting appears only for the Type 2 model.  
Default: [Inactive]  
• Active  
• Inactive  
• Manual POP  
Connects to the POP3 server to receive e-mail messages manually.  
Press [Yes] to connect to the POP3 server and receive e-mail messages. Press [No] to exit to  
the previous level of the menu tree without connecting to the POP3 server.  
This setting appears only for the Type 2 model.  
Select Paper Tray  
Specifies the tray for printing received faxes. Note that only A4, Letter, or Legal size paper can be  
used for printing faxes. Make sure to select a tray that contains paper of the valid size.  
If Tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1] appears.  
Default: [Auto]  
• Auto  
The machine uses Tray 1 and Tray 2 if they contain paper of the same size. In this case, the  
machine starts to print from the tray specified as the priority tray in [Paper Tray Priority] under tray  
paper settings. If that tray runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the other tray to  
continue printing.  
• Tray 1  
• Tray 2  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Features Settings  
Delete TX Standby File  
Deletes unsent fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory. The machine can store up to 5 unsent  
fax jobs.  
This function is only performed when selected.  
• Delete Selected File  
To delete a fax job, select the desired job, and then select [Yes]. Selecting [No] exits to the  
previous level of the menu tree without deleting the fax job.  
• Delete All Files  
To delete the fax jobs, select [Yes]. Selecting [No] exits to the previous level of the menu tree  
without deleting the fax job.  
Communication Settings  
• ECM Transmission  
Sets the machine to automatically resend parts of the data that are lost during transmission.  
This function is not available with Internet Fax transmission.  
Default: [On]  
• Off  
• On  
• ECM Reception  
Sets the machine to automatically receive parts of the data that are lost during reception.  
This function is not available with Internet Fax transmission.  
Default: [On]  
• Off  
• On  
• Dial Tone Detect  
Sets the machine to detect a dial tone before the machine begins to dial the destination  
automatically.  
Default: [Detect]  
• Detect  
• Not Detect  
• Transmission Speed  
Specifies the transmission speed for the fax modem.  
Default: [33.6 Kbps]  
• 33.6 Kbps  
• 14.4 Kbps  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
• 9.6 Kbps  
• 7.2 Kbps  
• 4.8 Kbps  
• 2.4 Kbps  
• Reception Speed  
Specifies the reception speed for the fax modem.  
Default: [33.6 Kbps]  
• 33.6 Kbps  
• 14.4 Kbps  
• 9.6 Kbps  
• 7.2 Kbps  
• 4.8 Kbps  
• 2.4 Kbps  
• JBIG  
Enables transmission and reception of JBIG-compressed images.  
Note that to use this function, [ECM Transmission] and [ECM Reception] must also be  
enabled.  
This function is not available with Internet Fax.  
Default: [Active]  
• Active  
• Inactive  
Report Print Settings  
• Print TX Status Report  
Sets the machine to print a transmission report automatically after a fax transmission.  
When the machine is in Immediate Transmission mode, the image of the original will not be  
reproduced on the report, even if [Error Only (Image Attached)] or [Every TX (Image  
Attached)] is selected.  
Note that if a memory error occurs for LAN-Fax transmission, a transmission report will always  
be printed regardless of this setting.  
The transmission report will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper.  
Default: [Every TX (Image Attached)]  
The default depends on the [Country] setting.  
• Error Only  
Prints a report when a transmission error occurs.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Features Settings  
• Error Only (Image Attached)  
Prints a report with an image of the original when transmission error occurs.  
• Every TX  
Prints a report for every fax transmission.  
• Every TX (Image Attached)  
Prints a report with an image of the original for every fax transmission.  
• Do not Print  
• Print Fax Journal  
Sets the machine to print a fax journal automatically for every 50 fax jobs (both sent and  
received).  
The fax journal will be printed using the tray set for [Facsimile] under [Paper Tray Priority] in  
tray paper settings, on A4 or Letter size paper.  
Default: [Auto Print]  
• Auto Print  
• Do not Auto Print  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Address Book Settings  
Quick Dial Dest.  
Specifies the fax number and name for Quick Dial entries. You can register up to 20 Quick Dial  
entries.  
• No.  
Specifies the Quick Dial number.  
• Fax No.  
Specifies the fax number for Quick Dial entries. The fax number can contain up to 40  
characters, including 0 to 9, pause, " ", " ", and space.  
• Name  
Specifies the name for Quick Dial entries. The name can contain up to 20 characters.  
Fax Speed Dial Dest.  
Specifies the fax number and name for Speed Dial entries. You can register up to 200 Speed Dial  
entries.  
• No.  
Specifies the Speed Dial number.  
• Fax No.  
Specifies the fax number for Speed Dial entries. The fax number can contain up to 40  
characters, including 0 to 9, pause, " ", " ", and space.  
• Name  
Specifies the name for Speed Dial entries. The name can contain up to 20 characters.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Settings  
System Settings  
Adjust Sound Volume  
Specifies the volume of the sounds produced by the machine.  
Default: [Low] for [Panel Key Sound], and [Middle] for other parameters.  
• Panel Key Sound  
Specifies the volume of the beep that sounds when a key is pressed.  
• Off  
• Low  
• Middle  
• High  
• Ring Volume  
Specifies the volume of the ring when a call is received.  
• Off  
• Low  
• Middle  
• High  
• On Hook Mode  
Specifies the volume of the sound from the speaker during on hook mode.  
• Off  
• Low  
• Middle  
• High  
• Job End Tone  
Specifies the volume of the beep that sounds when a job is complete.  
• Off  
• Low  
• Middle  
• High  
• Job Error Tone  
Specifies the volume of the beep that sounds when a fax transmission error occurs.  
• Off  
• Low  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
• Middle  
• High  
• Alarm Volume  
Specifies the volume of the alarm that sounds when an operation error occurs.  
• Off  
• Low  
• Middle  
• High  
I/O Timeout  
• USB  
Specifies how many seconds the machine waits for print data, if the data is interrupted while it  
is being sent from the computer via USB. If the machine does not receive any more data within  
the time specified here, the machine only prints the data it has received. If printing is frequently  
interrupted by data from other ports, increase the timeout period.  
Default: [60 sec.]  
• 15 sec.  
• 60 sec.  
• 300 sec.  
• Network  
Specifies how many seconds the machine waits for print data, if the data is interrupted while it  
is being sent from the computer via network. If the machine does not receive any more data  
within the time specified here, the machine only prints the data it has received. If printing is  
frequently interrupted by data from other ports, increase the timeout period.  
Default: [60 sec.]  
• 15 sec.  
• 60 sec.  
• 300 sec.  
• Locked Print  
Specifies how many seconds the machine holds a new Locked Print file, when the machine  
cannot store any more Locked Print files. Within this time, you can print or delete the new  
Locked Print file. You can also print or delete an existing Locked Print file so that the new  
Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.  
This setting appears only for the Type 2 model.  
Default: [60 seconds]  
• 0 to 300 seconds, in increments of 1 second  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
• User Authentication (Copy)  
Specifies how many seconds a user stays authenticated after paper is output when copying  
with the exposure glass. Note that authentication for other functions will expire immediately  
after using that function.  
This setting appears only for the Type 2 model (when the user restriction function is enabled  
via Web Image Monitor).  
Default: [30 seconds]  
• 5 to 60 seconds, in increments of 1 second  
• Fixed USB Port  
Specifies whether the same printer/LAN-Fax driver can be used for multiple machines or not  
under USB connection.  
Default: [Off]  
• Off  
You must install the printer/LAN-Fax driver separately for individual machines, because  
the machine other than the original will be recognized as a new device upon USB  
connection.  
• On  
The same printer/LAN-Fax driver you have installed in your computer can be used with  
any machine other than the one originally used for installation, if the machine is of the  
same model.  
Auto Continue  
Sets the machine to ignore an error with paper size or type and continue printing. The printing stops  
temporarily when an error is detected, and restarts automatically after about ten seconds using the  
settings made on the control panel. However, if the size of paper specified on the control panel  
and that of the paper loaded in the paper tray or the paper size specified for the print job do not  
match when printing restarts, it may cause a paper jam.  
Default: [Off]  
• Off  
• On  
Toner Saving  
Sets the machine to print using a reduced amount of toner (for prints made by the copier function  
only).  
Default: [Off]  
• Off  
• On  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Supplies Status  
Displays information about consumables.  
• Toner  
• Black  
• Magenta  
• Cyan  
• Yellow  
The level indicator (black squares) indicates the remaining life. You need to replace the  
consumable when the level is zero (completely white).  
• Other Supplies  
The information about intermediate transfer roller, fusing unit, and Intermediate Transfer Belt  
appear only for the Type 2 model.  
• Waste Toner Bottle:  
[Waste Toner Bottle: Full] (Usable), [WasteTnr.Bttl.: AlmostFull] (Almost full and needs  
replacing soon), [Waste Toner Bottle: Ready] (Needs replacing)  
• Fusing Unit:  
Displays the remaining life of the fusing unit.  
• IntTrans. Belt  
Displays the remaining life of the Intermediate Transfer Belt.  
• Transfer Roller:  
Displays the remaining life of the transfer roller.  
The level indicator (black squares) indicates the remaining life. You need to replace the  
consumable when the level is zero (completely white).  
Anti-Humidity Level  
Sets the machine to produce prints in consistent quality even when humidity is high.  
Note that the default value for this setting will not be restored by performing [Reset All Settings]  
under [Admin. Tools] or [Reset Menu Settings] under [Administrator Tools] of Web Image Monitor.  
Default: [Off]  
• Off  
• Lvl.1: Weak  
Select this mode if printouts are blurred.  
• Lvl.2: Medium  
Select this mode if printouts are curled and/or blurred. Note that if you select this mode, the  
first print takes longer than subsequent prints to be complete.  
• Lvl.3: Strong  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Select this mode if printouts are still curled and/or blurred even when prints are made in [Lvl.  
2: Medium]. Note that this mode requires more time to produce the first print than [Lvl.2:  
Medium].  
Color Registration  
Adjusts color registration as necessary. (This adjustment is usually executed by the machine  
automatically.)  
Press [Yes] to execute color registration adjustment. Press [No] to exit to the previous level of the  
menu tree without adjusting color registration.  
Auto Cleaning  
Sets the machine to execute periodic cleaning of the interior. You may hear some noise while  
cleaning is being executed. This noise does not indicate a malfunction.  
Default: [On]  
• On  
• Off  
B&W Print Priority  
Sets the machine to suppress the consumption of color toner when printing black-and-white pages.  
Also, the amount of color toner consumed during warm-up time for maintenance will also be  
lowered. Note that the default value for this setting will not be restored by performing [Reset All  
Settings] under [Admin. Tools] or [Reset Menu Settings] under [Administrator Tools] of Web Image  
Monitor.  
Default: [Off]  
• On  
• Off  
Notify: Toner Almost Empty  
Specifies the low toner level notification timing.  
Note that the default value for this setting will not be restored by performing [Reset All Settings]  
under [Admin. Tools] or [Reset Menu Settings] under [Administrator Tools] of Web Image Monitor.  
Default: [Normal]  
• Sooner  
Low toner level notification will be made when the number of pages that can be printed with  
the remaining toner is approximately 300.  
• Normal  
Low toner level notification will be made when the number of pages that can be printed with  
the remaining toner is approximately 200.  
• Later  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Low toner level notification will be made when the number of pages that can be printed with  
the remaining toner is approximately 100.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tray Paper Settings  
Tray Paper Settings  
• Paper Size: Tray 1  
Specifies the paper size for Tray 1.  
Default:  
11]  
(mainly Europe and Asia) [A4],  
(mainly North America) [8 1/2 ×  
• A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2, 8 ×  
13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 16K, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL  
Env, Custom Size  
• Paper Size: Tray 2  
Specifies the paper size for Tray 2.  
This setting appears only when the optional paper feed unit is installed.  
Default:  
11]  
(mainly Europe and Asia) [A4],  
(mainly North America) [8 1/2 ×  
• A4, 8 1/2 × 11  
• Paper Size: Bypass Tray  
Specifies the paper size for bypass tray.  
Default:  
11]  
(mainly Europe and Asia) [A4],  
(mainly North America) [8 1/2 ×  
• A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2, 8 ×  
13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 16K, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL  
Env, Custom Size  
• Paper Type: Tray 1  
Specifies the paper type for Tray 1.  
Default: [Plain Paper]  
• Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Middle Thick Paper, Thick Paper 1, Recycled Paper, Color Paper,  
Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Prepunched Paper, Label Paper, Bond Paper, Cardstock,  
Envelop, Thick Paper 2  
• Paper Type: Tray 2  
Specifies the paper type for Tray 2.  
This setting appears only when the optional paper feed unit is installed.  
Default: [Plain Paper]  
• Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Middle Thick Paper, Thick Paper 1, Recycled Paper, Color Paper,  
Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Prepunched Paper  
• Paper Type: Bypass Tray  
Specifies the paper type for bypass tray.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Default: [Plain Paper]  
• Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Middle Thick Paper, Thick Paper 1, Recycled Paper, Color Paper,  
Letterhead, Prepunched Paper, Label Paper, Bond Paper, Cardstock, Envelope, Thick Paper 2  
• Tray1 Priority  
Specifies how print jobs using Tray 1 are handled.  
Default: [Machine Setting(s)]  
• Machine Setting(s)  
The paper settings configured on the machine's control panel are applied to all print jobs. An  
error occurs when the paper settings specified by the printer driver or the print command do  
not match the machine's settings.  
• Driver/Command  
When executing a print job specifying the paper tray, the paper settings specified in the  
printer driver or in the print command are applied regardless of the machine's settings.  
• Bypass Tray Priority  
Specifies how print jobs using the bypass tray are handled.  
Default: [Driver/Command]  
• Machine Setting(s)  
The paper settings configured on the machine's control panel are applied to all print jobs. An  
error occurs when the paper settings specified by the printer driver or the print command do  
not match the machine's settings.  
• Driver/Command  
When executing a print job specifying the paper tray, the paper settings specified in the  
printer driver or in the print command are applied regardless of the machine's settings.  
• Any Size/Type  
Printing proceeds even if the paper size/type settings of the machine and printer driver do not  
match. However, if the paper is too small for the print job, the printed image will be cropped.  
• Any Custom Size/Type  
The machine prints custom size print jobs according to the printer driver’s settings and prints  
standard size print jobs according to the machine’s settings.  
For custom size print jobs, printing proceeds even if the paper size/type settings of the  
machine and printer driver do not match. However, if the paper is too small for the print job,  
the printed image will be cropped.  
For standard size print jobs, an error will occur if the paper size/type settings of the machine  
and printer driver do not match.  
• Paper Tray Priority  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tray Paper Settings  
Specifies the tray that the machine uses first for print jobs, printing out copies, or printing out faxes,  
from Tray 1 or Tray 2.  
If multiple trays contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be used for printing; when  
that tray runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the next tray to continue printing.  
If Tray 2 is not installed, [Tray 2] does not appear.  
Default for all functions: [Tray 1]  
• Printer  
If automatic tray selection is specified for the print job and both tray 1 and tray 2 contain  
paper that matches the print job, the machine starts to print from the specified tray.  
• Tray 1  
• Tray 2  
• Copier  
Selects a tray to check first when [A4], or [8 1/2 × 11] is selected for [Select Paper] under  
copy settings and both tray 1 and tray 2 contain paper of that size, the machine starts to print  
from the specified tray.  
• Tray 1  
• Tray 2  
• Facsimile  
[Auto] is selected for [Select Paper Tray] under fax feature settings, and both Tray 1 and Tray  
2 contain paper of the same size, the machine starts to print from the specified tray.  
• Tray 1  
• Tray 2  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Printing Lists/Reports  
Printing the Configuration Page  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
DAC509  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Print List/Report], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Configuration Page], and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.  
Types of Lists/Reports  
• Reports will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray  
before printing reports.  
Configuration Page  
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.  
Fax Journal  
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs.  
TX/RX Standby File List  
Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed, sent, or forwarded.  
Quick Dial Dest. List  
Prints a list of scan and fax Quick Dial entries.  
Fax Speed Dial Dest. List  
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.  
• Sort by Speed Dial No.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printing Lists/Reports  
Prints the list with the entries sorted by Speed Dial registration number.  
• Sort by Name  
Prints the list with the entries sorted by name.  
Scanner Dest. List  
Prints a list of scan destinations.  
Scanner Journal  
Prints a scanner journal for the last 100 Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and Scan to Folder  
transmissions.  
Maintenance Page  
Prints the maintenance page.  
Special Sender List  
Prints a list of fax Special Senders.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Printer Features Settings  
List/Test Print  
Prints lists showing configurations on the machine.  
The lists will be printed using the tray set for [Printer] under [Paper Tray Priority] in tray paper  
settings on A4 or Letter size paper.  
• Config. Page  
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.  
• Menu List  
Prints the machine's function menus.  
• Test Page  
Prints a test page for checking the single-sided printing condition. The test page contains  
network settings.  
• PCL Font List  
Prints installed PCL font list.  
• PS Font List  
Prints installed PostScript font list.  
System  
• Copies  
Sets the machine to print the specified number of sets.  
This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print is specified by the printer driver.  
Default: 1  
• 1 to 999  
• Sub Paper Size  
Sets the machine to print onto paper of another size if the specified paper is not loaded in any  
tray. Alternative sizes are preset to A4 and Letter.  
Default: [Off]  
• Auto  
• Off  
• Default Page Size  
Specifies the paper size to be used when the paper size is not specified in the print job.  
Default:  
(mainly Europe and Asia) [A4],  
(mainly North America) [8  
1/2 × 11]  
• A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2,  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer Features Settings  
7 1/4 × 10 1/2, 8 × 13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 16K, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2,  
3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL Env  
• Duplex  
Sets the machine to print on both sides of paper according to the specified binding method.  
Default: [None]  
• None  
• Long Edge Bind  
• Short Edge Bind  
• Blank Page Print  
Sets the machine to print blank pages.  
When cover sheet printing is enabled from the printer driver, cover sheets are inserted even if  
you select [Off].  
Note that this setting has lower priority than the printer driver's blank page setting.  
Default: [On]  
• On  
• Off  
• B&W Page Detect  
Sets the machine to print all monochrome pages in monochrome mode even if color printing is  
specified.  
Default: [On]  
• On  
• Off  
• Print Error Report  
Sets the machine to print an error page when the machine detects a printer or memory error.  
Default: [Off]  
• On  
• Off  
PCL Menu  
Specifies conditions when using PCL for printing.  
• Orientation  
Specifies the page orientation.  
Default: [Portrait]  
• Portrait  
• Landscape  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
• Form Lines  
Specifies the number of lines per page between 5 and 128.  
Default:  
(mainly Europe and Asia) 64,  
(mainly North America) 60  
• Font Number  
Specifies the ID of the default font you want to use between 0 and 89.  
Default: 0  
• Point Size  
Specifies the point size you want to use for the default font between 4.00 and 999.75 in 0.25  
increments.  
Default: 12.00 points  
• Font Pitch  
Specifies the number of characters per inch you want to use for the default font between 0.44  
and 99.99 in 0.01 increments.  
This setting is effective only for fixed-space fonts.  
Default: 10.00 pitch  
• Symbol Set  
Specifies the character set for the default font. The following sets are available:  
Default: [PC-8]  
• Roman-8, Roman-9, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852,  
PC-858, PC8-TK, Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ,  
Math-8, PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO  
21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0, MC Text, ISO L6, ISO L9, PC-775, PC-1004, Win  
Baltic  
• Courier Font  
Specifies a courier-type font.  
Default: [Regular]  
• Regular  
• Dark  
• Ext. A4 Width  
Sets the machine to extend the width of the printable area of A4 size paper, reducing side  
margin width.  
Default: [Off]  
• On  
• Off  
• Append CR to LF  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Features Settings  
Sets the machine to append a CR code to each LF code to print text data clearly.  
Default: [Off]  
• On  
• Off  
• Resolution  
Specifies the print resolution in dots per inch.  
Default: [600 × 600 1bit]  
• 600 × 600 1bit  
• 600 × 600 2bit  
• 600 × 600 4bit  
PS Menu  
Specifies conditions when using PostScript for printing.  
• Resolution  
Specifies the print resolution in dots per inch.  
Default: [600 × 600 1bit]  
• 600 × 600 1bit  
• 600 × 600 2bit  
• 600 × 600 4bit  
• Color Profile  
Specifies the color profile.  
Default: [Solid Color]  
• Solid Color  
• Presentation  
• Photographic  
• Off  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Network Settings  
• Depending on the settings you change, the machine might need to be restarted.  
Ethernet  
• MAC Address  
Displays the machine's MAC address.  
• Ethernet Speed  
Displays the current Ethernet speed setting.  
• 100Mbps Full Duplex  
• 100Mbps Half Duplex  
• 10Mbps Full Duplex  
• 10Mbps Half Duplex  
• Ethernet Unavailable  
Appears when a network cable is not connected.  
• Set Ethernet Speed  
Specifies the speed for Ethernet communication. Select a speed that matches your network  
environment.  
For most networks, the default setting is the optimum setting.  
Default: [Auto Select]  
• Auto Select  
• 100Mbps Full Duplex  
• 100Mbps Half Duplex  
• 10Mbps Full Duplex  
• 10Mbps Half Duplex  
Wi-Fi Configuration  
• Wi-Fi  
Select whether to enable or disable Wireless LAN.  
Default: [Inactive]  
• Inactive  
• Active  
If [Inactive] is set, [Wi-Fi Status], [MAC Address], [Current Connection], [Setup Wizard], and  
[WPS] are not displayed.  
• Wi-Fi Status  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Network Settings  
Displays the current connection status.  
• MAC Address  
Displays the machine's MAC address.  
• Current Connection  
Displays detailed information about the connection, such as the SSID and the wireless signal  
strength.  
• Setup Wizard  
Displays the procedure for manually connecting to a wireless LAN. It leads you step-by-step  
through configuring the settings for connecting with a wireless LAN.  
• WPS  
Connects with one touch using WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). For details, see Wi-Fi Settings  
Guide.  
IPv4 Configuration  
• DHCP  
Sets the machine to receive its IPv4 address, subnet mask, and default gateway address  
automatically from a DHCP server.  
Default: [Active]  
• Inactive  
• Active  
• IP Address  
Specifies the machine's IPv4 address when DHCP is not used.  
Use this menu to check the current IP address when DHCP is used.  
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
The numbers represented by "X" vary according to your network environment.  
• Subnet Mask  
Specifies the machine's subnet mask when DHCP is not used.  
Use this menu to check the current subnet mask when DHCP is used.  
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
The numbers represented by "X" vary according to your network environment.  
• Gateway Address  
Specifies the machine's default gateway address when DHCP is not used.  
Use this menu to check the current default gateway address when DHCP is used.  
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
The numbers represented by "X" vary according to your network environment.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
• IP Address Method  
Displays the IP address acquisition method.  
• IP Not Ready  
• DHCP  
• Manual Config.  
• Default IP  
IPv6 Configuration  
• IPv6  
Select whether to enable or disable IPv6.  
Default: [Active]  
• Active  
• Inactive  
• DHCP  
Sets the machine to receive its IPv6 address from a DHCP server.  
Default: [Inactive]  
• Active  
• Inactive  
• IP Address (DHCP)  
Displays the IPv6 address obtained from a DHCP server.  
• Manual Config. Address  
• Manual Config. Address  
Specifies the machine's IPv6 address when DHCP is not used. Can contain up to 39  
characters.  
• Prefix Length  
Specifies the prefix length, using a value between 0 and 128.  
• Gateway Address  
Specifies the IPv6 address of the default gateway. Can contain up to 39 characters.  
• Stateless Address  
Displays the IPv6 stateless addresses obtained from a Router Advertisement.  
• Stateless Address 1  
• Stateless Address 2  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Network Settings  
• Stateless Address 3  
• Stateless Address 4  
• Link-local Address  
Displays the IPv6 link local address.  
• Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Administrator Settings  
Set Date/Time  
Sets the date and time of the machine’s internal clock.  
• Set Date  
Specifies the date of the machine’s internal clock.  
Only dates that correspond with the year and month can be set. Incompatible dates will be  
refused.  
Default  
Date format:  
(mainly Europe and Asia) [Day/Month/Year],  
(mainly  
North America) [Year/Month/Day]  
• Date format: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, or Year/Month/Day  
Year: 2000 to 2099  
Month: 1 to 12  
Day: 1 to 31  
• Set Time  
Sets the time of the machine's internal clock.  
Default  
Time format:  
(mainly Europe and Asia) [24-hour Format],  
(mainly  
North America) [12-hour Format]  
• Time format: 12-hour Format, 24-hour Format  
AM/PM stamp: AM, PM (for 12-hour Format)  
Hour: 0 to 23 (for 24-hour Format), or 1 to 12 (for 12-hour Format)  
Minute: 0 to 59  
Program Fax Information  
Specifies the fax name and fax number of the machine.  
• Number:  
Specifies the fax number of the machine using up to 20 characters, including 0 to 9, space,  
and "+".  
• Name:  
Specifies the fax name of the machine using up to 20 alphanumeric characters and symbols.  
Dial/Push Phone  
Specifies the line type of the telephone line.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Administrator Settings  
To configure this setting, contact your telephone company and select the setting based on your  
telephone line. Selecting a wrong setting may cause failures in fax transmissions.  
[Dial Phone (20PPS)] may not appear depending on the country setting of the machine.  
Default: [Push Phone]  
• Push Phone  
• Dial Phone (10PPS)  
• Dial Phone (20PPS)  
PSTN / PBX  
Sets the machine to connect to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) or a private branch  
exchange (PBX).  
Default: [PSTN]  
• PSTN  
• PBX  
PBX Access Number  
Specifies the dial number to access the outside line when the machine is connected to a PBX.  
Make sure that this setting matches the setting of your PBX. Otherwise, you may not be able to send  
faxes to outside destinations.  
Default: 9  
• 0 to 999  
Function Priority  
Specifies the mode that is activated when the power is turned on, or if the time specified for [System  
Auto Reset Timer] elapses without activity while the initial screen of the current mode is displayed.  
Default: [Copier]  
• Copier  
• Facsimile  
• Scanner  
System Auto Reset Timer  
Sets the machine to return to the mode specified in [Function Priority].  
This setting is also applied to the timeout for copying the next document while ID card copy and  
manual 2-sided copy is performed.  
Default: [On] (1 min.)  
• On (30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., 3 min., 5 min., 10 min.)  
• Off  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
Energy Saver Mode  
Sets the machine to enter Energy Saver mode, Energy Saver mode 1 or Energy Saver mode 2, to  
reduce power consumption. The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a  
print job, prints a received fax, or when [Copy], [Color Start], or [B&W Start] key is pressed.  
• EnergySaverMode 1  
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 1 if the machine has been idle for about 30 seconds.  
It takes less time to recover from Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off state or Energy  
Saver mode 2, but power consumption is higher in Energy Saver mode 1 than in Energy  
Saver mode 2.  
Default: [Off]  
• Off  
• On (30 seconds)  
• EnergySaverMode 2  
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 2 after the period of time specified for this setting is  
passed. The machine consumes less power in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy Saver  
mode 1, but it takes longer to recover from Energy Saver mode 2 than from Energy Saver  
mode 1.  
Default: [On] (1 minute)  
• On (1 to 240 minutes)  
• Off  
Language  
Specifies the language used on the screen and in reports.  
The default value for this setting is the language you have specified during the Initial Setup, which is  
required after turning on the machine for the first time.  
Country  
Selects the country in which the machine is used. The country code you specify determines the time  
and date display format and the default values of the fax transmission-related settings.  
Make sure to select the country code correctly. Selecting a wrong country code may cause failures  
in fax transmissions.  
The default value for this setting is the country code you have specified during the Initial Setup,  
which is required after turning on the machine for the first time.  
Reset Settings  
Be sure not to clear the settings by mistake.  
• Reset All Settings  
Resets the machine's settings to their defaults except the following: language for the screen,  
country setting, network settings, and fax Quick Dial/Speed Dial destinations.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Settings  
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the previous level of the menu tree without clearing  
the settings.  
• Reset Network Settings  
Resets the network settings to their defaults.  
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the previous level of the menu tree without clearing  
the settings.  
• Clear Address Book  
Clears the fax Quick Dial/Speed Dial destinations.  
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the previous level of the menu tree without clearing  
the destinations.  
Shortcut to Function  
Assigns one of the following functions to the [ID Card Copy] key on the control panel.  
Default: [ID Card Copy Mode]  
• ID Card Copy Mode  
Press the key to switch to the ID card copy mode.  
• Fax Auto Print Setting  
Press the key to switch to the [Print Received File] menu.  
• Fax Immediate TX  
Press the key to switch to the [Immediate TX] menu.  
• Address Book for FAX  
Press the key to switch to the fax address book registration menu.  
• Select Scanner Dest.  
Press the key to switch to the scanner destination selection menu.  
PCL6 Mode  
Set this to [Universal] when using the Universal Driver and to [SP C250/C252] when using the  
normal driver.  
Default: [SP C250/C252]  
• Universal  
• SP C250/C252  
Admin. Tools Lock  
Specifies a four-digit password for accessing the [Address Book], [Network Settings], and [Admin.  
Tools] menus.  
Do not forget this password.  
• On (0000 to 9999)  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel  
• Off  
IPsec  
Selects whether to enable or disable IPsec.  
This function appears only when a password is specified under [Admin. Tools Lock].  
Default: [Inactive]  
• Active  
• Inactive  
Fax Number Confirmation  
Sets the machine to require a fax number to be entered twice when specifying a destination  
manually.  
When this function is enabled, you cannot use the On Hook Dial function.  
This function appears only when a password is specified under [Admin. Tools Lock].  
Default: [Off]  
• On  
• Off  
Save Scn Data to USB  
Specify whether to enable or disable Scan to USB.  
This function appears only when a password is specified under [Admin. Tools Lock].  
Default: [Active]  
• Active  
• Inactive  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web  
Image Monitor  
Using Web Image Monitor  
• To operate the machine via Web Image Monitor, you must first configure the machine's TCP/IP or  
• Some items might not appear, depending on the model type you are using.  
• Some items can also be configured using the control panel.  
Available operations  
The following operations can be performed remotely using Web Image Monitor on a computer:  
• Displaying the machine’s status or settings  
• Configuring the machine's settings  
• Registering the scan and fax destinations  
• Registering the fax Special Senders  
• Configuring the user restriction settings  
• Configuring the network settings  
• Configuring the IPsec settings  
• Printing reports  
• Setting the administrator password and e-mail address  
• Resetting the machine's configuration to the factory default  
• Creating backup files of the machine's configuration  
• Restoring the machine's configuration from backup files  
• Configuring the machine's date and time  
• Configuring the machine's Energy Saver mode setting  
Supported Web browsers  
• Windows:  
Internet Explorer 6.0- 11.0  
• Mac OS X:  
Safari 3.0- 6.0  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Displaying Top Page  
When you access the machine using Web Image Monitor, the top page appears in your browser's  
window.  
1. Launch the Web browser.  
2. In the Web browser's address bar, enter "http://(machine’s IP address)/" to access the  
machine.  
If a DNS or WINS server is used and the machine’s host name has been specified, you can enter  
the host name instead of the IP address.  
The top page of Web Image Monitor appears.  
Top page  
Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas:  
2
3
1
4
DAC523  
1. Menu area  
Clicking a menu shows its contents in the main area.  
2. Tab area  
Contains tabs for switching between information and settings you want to see or configure.  
3. FAQs/Knowledge Base  
Provides answers to frequently asked questions and other useful information about using this  
machine.  
An internet connection is required to view this information.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Displaying Top Page  
4. Main area  
Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area.  
Information in the main area is not automatically updated. Click [Refresh] at the upper-right in  
the main area to update the information. Click the Web browser's [Refresh] button to refresh  
the entire browser screen.  
• If you use an older version of a supported Web browser or the Web browser has JavaScript and  
cookies disabled, display and operation problems may occur.  
• If you are using a proxy server, configure the Web browser settings as necessary. For details about  
the settings, contact your network administrator.  
• The previous page may not appear even if the back button of the Web browser is clicked. If this  
happens, click the refresh button of the Web browser.  
• The FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)/Knowledge Base are not available in certain languages.  
Changing the Interface Language  
Select the desired interface language from the [Language] list.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Checking the System Information  
Click [Home] to display the main page of Web Image Monitor. You can check the current system  
information on this page.  
This page contains three tabs: [Status], [Counter], and [Machine Information].  
Status Tab  
Item  
Model Name  
Location  
Description  
Shows the name of the machine.  
Shows the location of the machine as registered on the [SNMP] page.  
Contact  
Shows the contact information of the machine as registered on the [SNMP]  
page.  
Host Name  
Shows the host name specified in [Host Name] on the [DNS] page.  
Shows the current messages on the machine's display.  
Device Status  
Toner  
Item  
Description  
Shows the amount of black toner remaining.  
Shows the amount of magenta toner remaining.  
Shows the amount of yellow toner remaining.  
Shows the amount of cyan toner remaining.  
Black  
Magenta  
Yellow  
Cyan  
Waste Toner Bottle  
Shows the remaining life of the waste toner bottle, as "Status OK", "Almost  
Full" or "Full".  
Intermediate Transfer  
Unit  
Shows the remaining life of the intermediate transfer unit, as "Status OK",  
"Replacement Required Soon" or "Replacement Required".  
For replacing, contact your sales or service representative.  
Fusing Unit  
Shows the remaining life of the fusing unit, as "Status OK", "Replacement  
Required Soon" or "Replacement Required".  
For replacing, contact your sales or service representative.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Checking the System Information  
Item  
Description  
Transfer Roller  
Shows the remaining life of the transfer roller, as "Status OK", "Replacement  
Required Soon" or "Replacement Required".  
For replacing, contact your sales or service representative.  
Paper Tray  
Item  
Description  
Tray 1  
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of Tray 1.  
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of Tray 2.  
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of the bypass tray.  
Tray 2  
Bypass Tray  
• If a non-genuine print cartridge is installed, toner life cannot be reliably indicated.  
• The information about intermediate transfer unit, fusing unit, and transfer roller appear only for the  
Type 2 model.  
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.  
Counter Tab  
Page Counter  
Item  
Description  
Printer  
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer function:  
• Total number of pages printed using the printer function, and lists/  
reports printed from the [List/Test Print] menu under [Printer Features]  
• Number of color pages  
• Number of black-and-white pages printed using the printer function  
Scanner  
Shows the following for pages scanned using the scanner function:  
• Total number of pages  
• Number of color pages  
• Number of black-and-white pages  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Item  
Description  
Copier  
Fax  
Shows the following for pages printed using the copier function:  
• Total number of pages  
• Number of color pages  
• Number of black-and-white pages  
Shows the following for telephone line faxes:  
• Total number of pages sent and received  
• Number of pages sent  
• Number of pages received  
Machine Counter  
Item  
Description  
Machine Counter  
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer, copier, and fax  
functions, and lists/reports:  
• Total number of pages  
• Number of color pages  
• Number of black-and-white pages  
Black  
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer, copier, and fax  
functions, and lists/reports:  
• Accumulated value of black toner A4 page coverage (in percent)  
• Accumulated value of black toner consumption (converted into fully-  
covered A4 pages)  
Cyan  
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer, copier, and fax  
functions, and lists/reports:  
• Accumulated value of cyan toner A4 page coverage (in percent)  
• Accumulated value of cyan toner consumption (converted into fully-  
covered A4 pages)  
Magenta  
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer, copier, and fax  
functions, and lists/reports:  
• Accumulated value of magenta toner A4 page coverage (in percent)  
• Accumulated value of magenta toner consumption (converted into  
fully-covered A4 pages)  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking the System Information  
Item  
Description  
Yellow  
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer, copier, and fax  
functions, and lists/reports:  
• Accumulated value of yellow toner A4 page coverage (in percent)  
• Accumulated value of yellow toner consumption (converted into fully-  
covered A4 pages)  
Economy Color Prints  
Item  
Description  
Economy Color Prints  
(Color)  
Shows the number of pages printed in Economy Color Printing mode using  
the printer function.  
Black  
Shows the following for pages printed in Economy Color Printing mode  
using the printer function:  
• Accumulated value of black toner A4 page coverage (in percent)  
• Accumulated value of black toner consumption (converted into fully-  
covered A4 pages)  
Cyan  
Shows the following for pages printed in Economy Color Printing mode  
using the printer function:  
• Accumulated value of cyan toner A4 page coverage (in percent)  
• Accumulated value of cyan toner consumption (converted into fully-  
covered A4 pages)  
Magenta  
Yellow  
Shows the following for pages printed in Economy Color Printing mode  
using the printer function:  
• Accumulated value of magenta toner A4 page coverage (in percent)  
• Accumulated value of magenta toner consumption (converted into  
fully-covered A4 pages)  
Shows the following for pages printed in Economy Color Printing mode  
using the printer function:  
• Accumulated value of yellow toner A4 page coverage (in percent)  
• Accumulated value of yellow toner consumption (converted into fully-  
covered A4 pages)  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Duplex  
Item  
Description  
Shows the total number of sheets printed on both sides.  
Duplex Total Page  
• A sheet printed on both sides counts as two printed pages.  
Machine Information Tab  
Machine Information  
Item  
Firmware Version  
Engine FW Version  
PCL Version  
Description  
Shows the version of firmware installed on the machine.  
Shows the version of firmware for the machine engine.  
Shows the version of the PCL interpreter.  
PS Version  
Shows the version of the PS interpreter.  
Machine ID  
Shows the identification number of the machine.  
Shows that a fax card is installed.  
Fax Card  
Total Memory  
Shows the total memory installed on the machine.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the System Settings  
Configuring the System Settings  
Click [System Settings] to display the page for configuring the system settings.  
This page contains the following tabs: [Sound Volume Adjustment], [Tray Paper Settings], [Copier],  
[Fax], [Priority Tray], [Toner Saving], [I/O Timeout], [B&W Print Priority] and [Shortcut to Function].  
Sound Volume Adjustment Tab  
Sound Volume Adjustment  
Item  
Description  
Panel Key Sound  
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a key is pressed from [Off],  
[Low], [Middle], or [High].  
Ring Volume  
Select the volume of the ring when a call is received from [Off], [Low],  
[Middle], or [High].  
On Hook Mode  
Job End Tone  
Job Error Tone  
Alarm Volume  
Select the volume of the sound from the speaker during on hook mode from  
[Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].  
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a job is complete from  
[Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].  
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a fax transmission error  
occurs from [Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].  
Select the volume of the alarm that sounds when an operation error occurs  
from [Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].  
Tray Paper Settings Tab  
Tray 1  
Item  
Description  
Paper Size  
Select the paper size for Tray 1 from the following:  
A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7  
1/4 × 10 1/2, 8 × 13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 16K, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3  
7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL Env, Custom Size  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Item  
Description  
Select the paper type for Tray 1 from the following:  
Paper Type  
2
2
Thin Paper (60-65g/m ), Plain Paper (66-74g/m ), Middle Thick Paper  
2
2
(75-90g/m ), Thick Paper 1 (91-105g/m ), Recycled Paper, Color  
Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Prepunched Paper, Label Paper, Bond  
Paper, Cardstock, Envelope, Thick Paper 2 (106-160g/m )  
2
Tray 2  
Item  
Description  
Paper Size  
Select the paper size for Tray 2 from the following:  
A4, 8 1/2 × 11  
Paper Type  
Select the paper type for Tray 2 from the following:  
2
2
Thin Paper (60-65g/m ), Plain Paper (66-74g/m ), Middle Thick Paper  
2
2
(75-90g/m ), Thick Paper 1 (91-105g/m ), Recycled Paper, Color  
Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Prepunched Paper  
Bypass Tray  
Item  
Description  
Paper Size  
Select the paper size for the bypass tray from the following:  
A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7  
1/4 × 10 1/2, 8 × 13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 16K, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3  
7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL Env, Custom Size  
Paper Type  
Select the paper type for the bypass tray from the following:  
2
2
Thin Paper (60-65g/m ), Plain Paper (66-74g/m ), Middle Thick Paper  
2
2
(75-90g/m ), Thick Paper 1 (91-105g/m ), Recycled Paper, Color  
Paper, Letterhead, Prepunched Paper, Label Paper, Bond Paper,  
Cardstock, Envelope, Thick Paper 2 (106-160g/m )  
2
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the System Settings  
Tray 1 Priority  
Item  
Description  
Tray 1 Priority  
Select how print jobs using the Tray 1 are handled.  
• System Settings  
The paper settings configured on the machine's control panel are  
applied to all print jobs. An error occurs when the paper settings  
specified by the printer driver or the print command do not match the  
machine's settings.  
• Driver/Command  
When executing a print job specifying the paper tray, the paper  
settings specified in the printer driver or in the print command are  
applied regardless of the machine's settings.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Bypass Tray Setting Priority  
Item  
Description  
Bypass Tray Setting  
Priority  
Select how print jobs using the bypass tray are handled.  
• System Settings  
The paper settings configured on the machine's control panel are  
applied to all print jobs. An error occurs when the paper settings  
specified by the printer driver or the print command do not match the  
machine's settings.  
• Driver/Command  
When executing a print job specifying the paper tray, the paper  
settings specified in the printer driver or in the print command are  
applied regardless of the machine's settings.  
• Any Size/Type  
Printing proceeds even if the paper size/type settings of the machine  
and printer driver do not match, but if the paper is too small for the  
print job, the printed image will be cropped.  
• Any Custom Size/Type  
The machine prints custom size print jobs according to the printer  
driver’s settings and prints standard size print jobs according to the  
machine’s settings.  
For custom size print jobs, printing proceeds even if the paper size/  
type settings of the machine and printer driver do not match, but if the  
paper is too small for the print job, the printed image will be cropped.  
For standard size print jobs, an error will occur if the paper size/type  
settings of the machine and printer driver do not match.  
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the System Settings  
Copier Tab  
Select Paper  
Item  
Description  
Select Paper  
Select the paper size used for printing copies from the following: [Tray 1],  
[Tray 2], [Bypass Tray], [A4], or [8 1/2 × 11].  
When a tray is selected, the machine prints from that tray only. When a  
paper size is selected, the machine checks the trays for the paper of the  
specified size in the order of priority as set in [Copier] in the [Priority Tray]  
page.  
If multiple trays contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be  
used for printing; when that tray runs out of paper, the machine  
automatically switches to the next tray to continue printing.  
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.  
Fax Tab  
Select Paper Tray  
Item  
Description  
Select Paper Tray  
Select the tray for printing faxes from the following: [Auto], [Tray 1], or  
[Tray 2].  
If [Auto] is selected, the machine uses Tray 1 and Tray 2 if they contain  
paper of the same size. In this case, the machine starts to print from the tray  
specified as the priority tray for [Fax] in the [Priority Tray] page. If that tray  
runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the other tray to  
continue printing.  
Only A4, Letter, or Legal size paper can be used for printing faxes. Make  
sure to select a tray that contains paper of the valid size.  
If Tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1] appears.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Fax Number Confirmation  
Item  
Description  
Fax Number  
Confirmation  
Enable this setting to configure the machine to require a fax number to be  
entered twice when specifying a destination manually.  
This setting appears only when the administrator password is set in the  
[Administrator] page.  
Fax Received File Processing  
Item  
Description  
Received File  
Processing  
Select whether received faxes are stored into the machine's memory for  
printing or forwarded to a destination specified for [Forwarding  
Destination].  
Print Automatically  
Select whether the faxes received into the machine's memory are printed  
automatically or stored for later manual printing.  
Print Forwarded File  
Notify Forward Status  
Select whether the forwarded faxes are printed or not.  
Select whether e-mail notifications are sent after forwarding faxes or not.  
Email notification destination depends on how [Forwarding Destination] is  
specified:  
• If specified with [E-mail Address]: the notification will be sent to the  
administrator e-mail address specified in [Administrator E-mail  
Address] in the [Administrator] page.  
• If specified with [Scan Destination]: the notification will be sent to the  
notification destination specified for the selected scan destination.  
Note that if a destination e-mail address is not specified, no notification will  
be sent even if this setting is enabled.  
Forwarding Destination Specifies the forwarding destination.  
• [E-mail Address]: Enter a destination e-mail address. Can contain up  
to 64 characters.  
• [Scan Destination]: Select a scan destination as a forwarding  
destination.  
Number of Trials of  
Forwarding (time)  
Specifies how many times the machine attempts to forward a fax (1 to 255  
times).  
Interval of Forwarding  
Trial (min.)  
Specifies how many minutes the machine waits between forwarding  
attempts (1 to 255 minutes).  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the System Settings  
Authorized Reception  
Item  
Description  
Authorized Reception  
Enable this setting to set the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from  
the programmed Special Senders. This helps you screen out unwanted  
documents, such as junk faxes, and prevents the wasting of fax paper.  
Special Senders can be programmed in the [Special Sender] page.  
Receive Conditions  
Specifies whether to receive or reject faxes from the programmed Special  
Senders.  
• Special Sender  
Receive faxes from the Special Senders and reject faxes from all other  
senders.  
• Other Than Special Sender  
Reject faxes from the Special Senders and receive faxes from all other  
senders.  
• [Fax Received File Processing] appears only for the Type 2 model.  
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.  
Priority Tray Tab  
Priority Tray  
Item  
Description  
Printer  
Select the tray that the machine checks first for paper that can be used for  
the job from [Tray 1] or [Tray 2].  
If automatic tray selection is specified for the print job and multiple trays  
contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be used for printing;  
when that tray runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the  
next tray to continue printing.  
Copier  
Select the tray that the machine checks first for paper that can be used for  
the job from [Tray 1] or [Tray 2].  
If [A4] or [8 1/2 × 11] is selected for [Select Paper] in the [Copier] page  
and multiple trays contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will  
be used for printing; when that tray runs out of paper, the machine  
automatically switches to the next tray to continue printing.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Item  
Description  
Fax  
Select the tray that the machine uses first for printing out faxes from [Tray 1]  
or [Tray 2].  
If [Auto] is selected for [Select Paper Tray] in the [Fax] page and both Tray  
1 and Tray 2 contain paper of the same size, the machine starts to print  
from the specified tray. If that tray runs out of paper, the machine  
automatically switches to the other tray to continue printing.  
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.  
Toner Saving Tab  
Toner Saving  
Item  
Description  
Toner Saving  
Enable this setting to print using a reduced amount of toner when printing  
out copies.  
I/O Timeout Tab  
I/O Timeout  
Item  
Description  
Fixed USB Port  
Specifies whether the same printer/LAN-Fax driver can be used for multiple  
machines or not under USB connection.  
If this setting is enabled, the same printer/LAN-Fax driver you have  
installed in your computer can be used with any machine other than the one  
originally used for installation, if the machine is of the same model.  
If disabled, you must install the printer/LAN-Fax driver separately for  
individual machines, because the machine other than the original will be  
recognized as a new device upon USB connection.  
Locked Print Timeout  
(seconds)  
Specifies how many seconds the machine holds a new Locked Print file,  
when the machine cannot store any more Locked Print files (0 to 300  
seconds). Within this time, you can print or delete the new Locked Print file.  
You can also print or delete an existing Locked Print file so that the new  
Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the System Settings  
• [Locked Print Timeout (seconds)] appears only for the Type 2 model.  
Black-and-White Print Priority Tab  
B&W Print Priority  
Item  
Description  
B&W Print Priority  
Enable this setting to suppress the consumption of color toner when printing  
black-and-white pages. Also, amount of color toner consumed during  
warm-up time for maintenance will also be lowered.  
Shortcut to Function Tab  
Shortcut to Function  
Item  
Description  
Shortcut to Function  
Settings  
Assigns one of the following functions to the [ID Card Copy] key on the  
control panel.  
• [ID Card Copy Mode]  
• [Fax Auto Print Setting]  
• [Fax Immediate TX]  
• [Address book for Fax]  
• [Select Scanner Destination]  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Registering Destinations  
Scan and fax destinations can be registered using Web Image Monitor.  
Up to 100 scan destinations and 200 fax destinations (20 Quick Dial and 200 Speed Dial destinations)  
can be registered. See the scan and fax sections for more information on registering destinations.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Registering Fax Special Senders  
Registering Fax Special Senders  
Fax Special Senders can be registered using Web Image Monitor.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Restricting Machine Functions According to  
User  
You can set the machine to require a user code when someone tries to use certain machine functions. For  
• This function is available for the Type 2 model only.  
• To print jobs that require authentication you can use only the PCL printer driver. Printing such jobs  
from the PostScript 3 printer driver is not possible.  
Using Web Image Monitor, enable user restriction for all or some of the functions listed below, and then  
register users who can use those functions.  
• Copying (both color and black-and-white)  
• Color copying  
• Sending faxes  
• Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder  
• Scan to USB  
• PictBridge printing  
• Printing (both color and black-and-white)  
• Color printing  
• Sending faxes via LAN-Fax  
For each user, you can specify which functions are available upon authentication. Up to 30 users can be  
registered.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Network Settings  
Configuring the Network Settings  
Click [Network Settings] to display the page for configuring the network settings.  
This page contains the following tabs: [Network Status], [IPv6 Configuration], [Network Application],  
[DNS], [Auto E-mail Notification], [SNMP], [SMTP], [POP3], [Internet Fax], and [Wireless].  
• Depending on the settings you change, the machine might need to be restarted.  
• Depending on the model you are using, some items might not appear.  
Network Status Tab  
General Status  
Item  
Description  
Ethernet Speed  
IPP Printer Name  
Network Version  
Shows the type and speed of the network connection.  
Shows the name used to identify the machine on the network.  
Shows the version of the machine's network module (a part of the machine  
firmware).  
Ethernet MAC Address Shows the Ethernet MAC address of the machine.  
Active Interface  
Shows the active communication method.  
TCP/IP Status  
Item  
Description  
DHCP  
Select whether the machine should receive a dynamic IPv4 address  
automatically using DHCP. To use DHCP, select [Active]. When enabled,  
the items below cannot be configured.  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway  
Enter the IPv4 address for the machine.  
Enter the subnet mask of the network.  
Enter the IPv4 address of the network gateway.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
IPv6 Configuration Tab  
IPv6  
Item  
Description  
IPv6  
Select whether to enable or disable IPv6. You cannot disable IPv6 using  
Web Image Monitor if the machine is currently in use in an IPv6  
environment. In this case, use the control panel to disable [IPv6] under  
network settings.  
When disabled, [DHCP], [Manual Configuration Address], [Prefix Length],  
and [Gateway Address] below cannot be configured.  
IPv6 Address  
Item  
Description  
DHCP  
Select whether or not the machine obtains its IPv6 address from a DHCP  
server.  
IP Address (DHCP)  
Displays the IPv6 address obtained from the DHCP server when [DHCP] is  
set to [Active].  
Stateless Address  
Gateway Address  
Link-local Address  
Displays up to four stateless auto addresses.  
Displays the machine's default gateway address.  
Displays the link local address of the machine. The link local address is an  
address that is valid only inside the local network (local segment).  
Manual Configuration  
Address  
Enter the machine's IPv6 address. Can contain up to 39 characters.  
Prefix Length  
Enter the prefix length, using a value between 0 and 128.  
Gateway Address  
Enter the default gateway's IPv6 address. Can contain up to 39 characters.  
Network Application Tab  
Scanner Send Setting  
Item  
Description  
E-mail  
Select to enable the Scan to E-mail feature.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Network Settings  
Item  
Description  
Max. E-mail Size  
Select the maximum size of scan files that can be attached to an e-mail  
message (1 to 5 MB, or no limit).  
FTP  
Select to enable the Scan to FTP feature.  
Select to enable the Scan to Folder feature.  
Folder  
Network Print Setting  
Item  
Description  
IPP  
Select to enable network printing using Internet Print Protocol (via TCP port  
631/80).  
FTP  
Select to enable network printing using an embedded FTP server in the  
machine (via TCP port 20/21).  
RAW  
Select to enable network raw printing.  
Port No.  
Enter the TCP port number to use for raw printing. The valid range is 1024  
to 65535, except 53550 and 49999 (default is 9100).  
LPR  
Select to enable network printing using LPR/LPD (via TCP port 515).  
mDNS Setting  
Item  
Description  
mDNS  
Select to enable Multicast DNS (via UDP port 5353). If disabled, the item  
below cannot be configured.  
Printer Name  
Enter the name of the machine. Can contain up to 32 characters.  
DNS Tab  
DNS  
Item  
Description  
DNS Method  
Select whether to specify domain name servers manually or receive DNS  
information from the network automatically. When set to [Auto-Obtain  
(DHCP)], [Primary DNS Server], [Secondary DNS Server], and [Domain  
Name] below become unavailable.  
Primary DNS Server  
Enter the IPv4 address of the primary DNS.  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Item  
Description  
Secondary DNS Server Enter the IPv4 address of the secondary DNS.  
Domain Name  
Enter the IPv4 domain name for the machine. Can contain up to 32  
characters.  
IPv6 DNS Method  
Select whether to specify the domain server manually or have the machine  
obtain its DNS information automatically.  
When set to [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)], [Primary IPv6 DNS Server],  
[Secondary IPv6 DNS Server], and [IPv6 Domain Name] below become  
unavailable.  
Primary IPv6 DNS  
Server  
Enter the IPv6 address of the primary IPv6 DNS server. Can contain up to  
39 characters.  
Secondary IPv6 DNS  
Server  
Enter the IPv6 address of the secondary IPv6 DNS server. Can contain up  
to 39 characters.  
IPv6 Domain Name  
Enter the IPv6 domain name of the machine. Can contain up to 32  
characters.  
DNS Resolve Priority  
Select whether to give priority to IPv4 or IPv6 for DNS name resolution.  
DNS Timeout (seconds) Enter the number of seconds the machine waits before considering a DNS  
request to have timed out (1 to 999 seconds).  
Host Name  
Enter a host name for the machine. Can contain up to 15 characters.  
Auto E-mail Notification Tab  
E-mail Notification 1/E-mail Notification 2  
Item  
Description  
Display Name  
Enter a sender name for notification e-mail. Can contain up to 32  
characters.  
E-mail Address  
Enter the address of the recipient of the alert email. Can contain up to 64  
characters.  
Paper Misfeed  
Out of Paper  
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if a paper jam occurs.  
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if paper runs out.  
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if toner becomes low.  
Toner Almost Empty  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Network Settings  
Item  
Call Service  
Description  
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if the machine  
requires servicing.  
Out of Toner  
Cover Open  
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if toner runs out.  
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if a cover is open.  
SNMP Tab  
SNMP  
Item  
Description  
SNMP  
Select whether to enable the machine to use SNMP services.  
Trap  
Item  
Description  
Target Trap  
Select whether to enable the machine to send traps to the management host  
(NMS).  
When disabled, [SNMP Management Host 1] and [SNMP Management  
Host 2] below become unavailable.  
SNMP Management  
Host 1  
Enter the IP address or host name of a management host. Can contain up to  
64 characters.  
SNMP Management  
Host 2  
Enter the IP address or host name of a management host. Can contain up to  
64 characters.  
Community  
Item  
Description  
Get Community  
Enter the community name to use for authentication of Get requests. Can  
contain up to 32 characters.  
Trap Community  
Enter the community name to use for authentication of Trap requests. Can  
contain up to 32 characters.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
System  
Item  
Description  
Location  
Contact  
Enter the location of the machine. The location entered here is displayed on  
the main page. Can contain up to 64 characters.  
Enter the contact information of the machine. The contact information  
entered here is displayed on the main page. Can contain up to 64  
characters.  
SMTP Tab  
SMTP  
Item  
Description  
Primary SMTP Server  
Enter the IP address or host name of the SMTP/POP3 server. Can contain  
up to 64 characters.  
Port No.  
Enter the port number for SMTP (1 to 65535).  
Authentication Method Select an authentication method from the following:  
[Anonymous]: The user name and password are not necessary.  
[SMTP]: The machine supports NTLM and LOGIN authentication.  
[POP before SMTP]: The POP3 server is used for authentication. When  
sending e-mails to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server  
security level by connecting to the POP server for authentication.  
User Name  
Password  
Enter the user name for logging in to the SMTP server. Can contain up to 32  
characters.  
Enter the password for logging in to the SMTP server. Can contain up to 32  
characters.  
Device E-mail Address Enter the machine’s e-mail address.  
This address is used as the sender's address of e-mail messages sent from  
this machine, such as notification e-mails. Can contain up to 64 characters.  
Server Timeout  
(seconds)  
Enter the number of seconds the machine waits before considering an  
SMTP operation to have timed out (1 to 999).  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Network Settings  
Item  
Time Zone  
Description  
Select a time zone according to your geographic location. Selecting a  
different time zone may cause transmission date and time to be incorrect for  
email sent by the Scan to E-mail function, even when the machine's clock is  
set correctly.  
POP3 Tab  
POP3 Settings  
Item  
Description  
POP3 Server  
Enter the IP address or host name of the POP3 server for e-mail reception.  
The POP3 server specified here will be used for [POP before SMTP]. Can  
contain up to 64 characters.  
User Account  
User Password  
Authentication  
Enter the user name for logging in to the POP3 server. Can contain up to 32  
characters.  
Enter the password for logging in to the POP3 server. Can contain up to 32  
characters.  
Select an authentication method from the following:  
[None]: Password will not be encrypted.  
[APOP Authentication]: Password will be encrypted.  
[Auto]: Password will be encrypted or not encrypted according to the POP3  
server’s settings.  
Internet Fax Tab  
Item  
Description  
Internet Fax  
Transmission  
Select whether to enable or disable the Internet Fax function.  
Error Notification E-  
mail  
Select whether to send a notification e-mail to the sender of the Internet Fax  
or not when e-mail reception fails.  
The text will include the machine's host name (as set in the DNS settings  
page), model name, and contact e-mail address (as set in the administrator  
settings page).  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Item  
Description  
Insert System-fixed Text Select whether to include system-fixed text in the body of the e-mail or not  
when sending Internet Faxes.  
The text will include the machine's host name (as set in the DNS settings  
page), model name, and contact e-mail address (as set in the administrator  
settings page).  
Automatic POP  
Select whether to automatically connect to the POP3 server to check for  
new e-mails or not. If this setting is enabled, the connection will be made at  
an interval specified in [POP Interval (minutes)].  
POP Server: E-mail  
Reception Setting  
Select whether to leave or delete e-mails in the POP3 server after receiving  
them.  
[No]: Delete e-mails from the server after receiving them.  
[Save E-mail]: Leave e-mails on the server after receiving them.  
[Save Only Error Info]: Delete e-mails that are successfully received from  
the server only.  
POP Interval (minutes)  
Specifies how many minutes the machine waits between automatic  
connections to the POP3 server to acquire new e-mails (2 to 1440  
minutes).  
• [Internet Fax] appears only for the Type 2 model.  
Wireless Tab  
Wireless LAN Status  
Item  
Description  
Wireless LAN Status  
MAC Address  
Displays the status of the connection to the wireless LAN.  
Displays the MAC address.  
Communication Mode Displays the communication mode that the machine is connecting in.  
SSID  
Displays the SSID of the access point that the machine is connected to.  
Channel  
Displays the channel information of the current wireless LAN settings if [Ad-  
Hoc] is selected for [Communication Mode].  
Wireless Signal Status  
Displays the strength of the wireless signal that is being received.  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Network Settings  
Item  
Description  
Wireless  
Specifies whether or not to use the wireless LAN.  
Wireless LAN Settings  
Item  
Description  
SSID  
Enter the SSID of the access point.  
The SSID can contain up to 32 characters.  
When you click [Scan List], a list of available access points is displayed.  
You can select the SSID from the list.  
Communication Mode Select the mode to connect in.  
If the machine will be connected to a wireless router or access point, select  
[Infrastructure]. If the machine will be connected to a device equipped with  
a wireless LAN directly, select [Ad-Hoc].  
Ad-Hoc Channel  
Authentication  
If [Ad-Hoc] is selected for [Communication Mode], select a channel.  
Select an authentication method.  
If [Ad-Hoc] is selected for [Communication Mode], you can select only  
[Open System] and [Shared Key].  
Encryption  
Select an encryption method.  
If [Ad-Hoc] is selected for [Communication Mode], you can select only  
[None] and [WEP].  
WPA Passphrase  
WEP Key Length  
WEP Transmit Key ID  
WEP Key Format  
If [WPA2-PSK] or [Mixed Mode WPA/WPA2] is selected for  
[Authentication], enter the WPA encryption key.  
If [WEP] is selected for [Encryption], select 64 bits or 128 bits for the length  
of the encryption key.  
Select an ID number to identify each WEP key in case multiple WEP  
connections are configured.  
Select a format for entering the WEP key.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Item  
Description  
WEP Key  
Enter the WEP key. The number and type of characters you can enter vary  
depending on the length and format selected for the key. See the following:  
• WEP key length: [64bit], Format: [Hexadecimal]  
WEP key max length: 10 characters (0-9, A-F, a-f)  
• WEP key length: [64bit], Format: [ASCII]  
WEP key max length: 5 characters (0x20-0x7e)  
• WEP key length: [128bit], Format: [Hexadecimal]  
WEP key max length: 26 characters (0-9, A-F, a-f)  
• WEP key length: [128bit], Format: [ASCII]  
WEP key max length: 13 characters (0x20-0x7e)  
• If you are configuring the connection settings manually, check the SSID, authentication method, or  
encryption key of the access point or wireless router in advance.  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the IPsec Settings  
Configuring the IPsec Settings  
Click [IPsec Settings] to display the page for configuring the IPsec settings.  
This page contains the following tabs: [IPsec Global Settings] and [IPsec Policy List].  
• This function is available only when an administrator password is specified.  
IPsec Global Settings Tab  
Item  
IPsec Function  
Default Policy  
Description  
Select whether to enable or disable IPsec.  
Select whether to allow for the default IPsec policy.  
Broadcast and  
Multicast Bypass  
Select the services that you do not want to apply IPsec from the following:  
[DHCPv4], [DHCPv6], [SNMP], [mDNS], [NetBIOS], [UDP Port 53550]  
All ICMP Bypass  
Select whether to apply IPsec to ICMP packets (IPv4 and IPv6) from the  
following:  
[Active]: All ICMP packets will be bypassed without IPsec protection.  
"ping" command (echo request and echo reply) is not encapsulated by  
IPsec.  
[Inactive]: Some ICMP message types will be bypassed without IPsec  
protection.  
IPsec Policy List Tab  
Item  
No.  
Description  
IPsec policy number.  
Name  
Displays the name of the IPsec policy.  
Address Settings  
Displays the IP address filter of the IPsec policy as below:  
Remote address/Prefix length  
Action  
Displays the action of the IPsec policy as "Allow", "Drop", or "Require  
Security".  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Item  
Description  
Displays the status of the IPsec policy as "Active" or "Inactive".  
Status  
To configure IPsec policies, select the desired IPsec policy, and then click [Change] to open the "IPsec  
Policy Settings" page. The following settings can be made on the "IPsec Policy Settings" page.  
IP Policy Settings  
Item  
Description  
No.  
Specify a number between 1 and 10 for the IPsec policy. The number you  
specify will determine the position of the policy in the IPsec Policy List. Policy  
searching is performed according to the order of the list. If the number you  
specify is already assigned to another policy, the policy you are  
configuring will take the number of the earlier policy, and the earlier policy  
and any subsequent policies will be renumbered accordingly.  
Activity  
Name  
Select whether to enable or disable the policy.  
Enter the name of the policy. Can contain up to 16 characters.  
Address Type  
Select IPv4 or IPv6 as the type of IP address to be used in IPsec  
communication.  
Local Address  
Displays the IP address of this printer.  
Remote Address  
Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the device with which to communicate.  
Can contain up to 39 characters.  
Prefix Length  
Action  
Enter the prefix length of the Remote Address, using a value between 1 and  
128. If this setting is left blank, "32" (IPv4) or "128" (IPv6) will be  
automatically selected.  
Specify how the IP packets are processed from the following:  
• [Allow]: IP packets are both sent and received without IPsec applied to  
them.  
• [Drop]: IP packets are discarded.  
• [Require Security]: IPsec is applied to IP packets that are both sent and  
received.  
If you have selected [Require Security], you must configure [IPsec Settings]  
and [IKE Settings].  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the IPsec Settings  
IPsec Settings  
Item  
Description  
Encapsulation Type  
Specify the encapsulation type from the following:  
• [Transport]: Select this mode to secure only the payload section of  
each IP packet when communicating with IPsec compliant devices.  
• [Tunnel]: Select this mode to secure every section of each IP packet.  
We recommend this type for communication between security  
gateways (such as VPN devices).  
Security Protocol  
Select the security protocol from the following:  
• [AH]: Establishes secure communication that supports authentication  
only.  
• [ESP]: Establishes secure communication that supports both  
authentication and data encryption.  
• [ESP&AH]: Establishes secure communication that supports both data  
encryption and authentication of packets, including packet headers.  
Note that you cannot specify this protocol when [Tunnel] is selected  
for [Encapsulation Type].  
Authentication  
Algorithm for AH  
Specify the authentication algorithm to be applied when [AH] or [ESP&AH]  
is selected for [Security Protocol] from the following:  
[MD5], [SHA1]  
Encryption Algorithm  
for ESP  
Specify the encryption algorithm to be applied when [ESP] or [ESP&AH] is  
selected for [Security Protocol] from the following:  
[None], [DES], [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192], [AES-256]  
Authentication  
Algorithm for ESP  
Specify the authentication algorithm to be applied when [ESP] is selected  
for [Security Protocol] from the following:  
[MD5], [SHA1]  
Life Time  
Specify the life time of the IPsec SA (Security Association) as a time period  
or data volume. The SA will expire when the time period you specify  
elapses or the volume of data you specify reaches the volume carried.  
If you specify both a time period and a data volume, the SA will expire as  
soon as either is reached, and a new SA will then be obtained by  
negotiation.  
To specify the life time of the SA as a time period, enter a number of  
seconds.  
To specify the life time of the SA as a data volume, enter a number of KBs.  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Item  
Description  
Key Perfect Forward  
Secrecy  
Select whether to enable or disable PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy).  
IKE Settings  
Item  
Description  
IKE Version  
Displays the IKE version.  
Encryption Algorithm  
Specify the encryption algorithm from the following:  
[DES], [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192], [AES-256]  
Authentication  
Algorithm  
Specify the authentication algorithm from the following:  
[MD5], [SHA1]  
IKE Life Time  
Specify the life time of the ISAKMP SA as a time period. Enter a number of  
seconds.  
IKE Diffie-Hellman  
Group  
Select the IKE Diffie-Hellman Group to be used in the generation of the IKE  
encryption key from the following:  
[DH1], [DH2]  
Pre-Shared Key  
Specify the PSK (Pre-Shared Key) to be used for authentication of a  
communicating device. Can contain up to 32 characters.  
Key Perfect Forward  
Secrecy  
Select whether to enable or disable PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy).  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Lists/Reports  
Printing Lists/Reports  
Click [Print List/Report] to display the page for printing reports. Then, select an item and click [Print] to  
print out information for that item.  
Print List/Report  
Item  
Configuration Page  
Fax Journal  
Description  
Prints general information about the machine and its current configuration.  
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs. For  
Fax TX/RX Standby File Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed,  
List sent, or forwarded.  
Quick Dial Destination Prints a list of Quick Dial entries.  
List  
Fax Speed Dial  
Destination List  
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.  
Scanner Destination List Prints a list of scan destinations.  
Scanner Journal  
Prints a scanner journal for the last 100 Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and  
Scan to Folder transmissions.  
Maintenance Page  
Prints the maintenance page.  
• Reports cannot be printed via Web Image Monitor if other jobs are printing. Before printing  
reports, confirm that machine is not printing.  
• Reports will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray  
before printing reports.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
Configuring the Administrator Settings  
Click [Administrator Tools] to display the page for configuring the administrator settings.  
This page contains the following tabs: [Administrator], [Reset Settings], [Backup Setting], [Restore  
Setting], [Set Date/Time], [Energy Saver Mode], and [PCL6 Mode].  
Administrator Tab  
Administrator Settings  
Item  
Description  
Change Password  
New Password  
Check this to configure the administrator password.  
Enter the new administrator password. Can contain up to 16 characters.  
Confirm New Password Enter the same password again, to confirm.  
Change E-mail Address Check this to configure the administrator e-mail address.  
Administrator E-mail  
Address  
Enter the administrator e-mail address.  
If the machine's e-mail address is not configured in the [SMTP] page, this  
address will be used as the sender's address of e-mails sent from this  
machine, such as notification e-mails and Internet Faxes. Can contain up to  
64 characters.  
• Administrator e-mail address can only be configured with the Type 2 model.  
Reset Settings Tab  
Reset Settings  
Item  
Description  
Reset Network Settings Select to restore settings configured under the [Network Settings] and  
[Administrator Tools].  
Reset Menu Settings  
Select to restore settings that are not related to the network to their defaults.  
Clear Scan Destination Select to clear the scan destinations.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuring the Administrator Settings  
Item  
Description  
Reset Settings of  
Select to clear the user restriction settings.  
Available Functions  
Clear Address Book  
Reset IPsec Settings  
Select to clear the fax destinations.  
Select to clear the IPsec settings.  
• [Reset IPsec Settings] appears only when the administrator password is specified.  
Backup Setting Tab  
• When sending the machine for repair, it is important that you create backup files in advance. The  
machine's settings are returned to the default after repair.  
Backup Setting  
Item  
Description  
Back up Network  
Settings  
Backs up settings configured under the [Network Settings] and  
[Administrator Tools].  
Note that, however, [Max. E-mail Size] setting under [Network  
Application] will not be backed up here; it will be backed up by [Back up  
Menu Settings] instead.  
Back up Menu Settings Backs up settings that are not related to the network.  
Back up Scan  
Destination  
Backs up scan destinations to a file.  
Back up Settings of  
Available Functions  
Backs up user restriction settings to a file.  
Back up Address Book Backs up fax destinations to a file.  
Back up IPsec Settings Backs up the IPsec settings to a file.  
Follow the procedure below to create configuration backup files.  
1. Select the radio button for the type of data you wish to back up.  
2. Enter the administrator password if required.  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
3. Click [OK].  
4. Click [Save] in the confirmation dialog box.  
5. Navigate to the location to save the backup file.  
6. Specify a name for the file, and click [Save].  
• [Back up IPsec Settings] appears only when the administrator password is specified.  
Restore Setting Tab  
• When the machine is returned from repair, it is important that you restore the machine's settings  
from the backup files. The machine's settings are returned to the default after repair.  
Restore Setting  
Item  
Description  
File to Restore  
Enter the path and name of the file to restore, or click [Browse...] to select  
the file.  
Follow the procedure below to restore configuration backup files.  
1. Click [Browse...].  
2. Navigate to the directory containing the backup file to restore.  
3. Select the backup file, and click [Open].  
4. Enter the administrator password if required.  
5. Click [OK].  
• If the settings are not restored successfully, an error message appears. Try again to restore the file  
completely.  
Set Date/Time Tab  
Set Date  
Item  
Description  
Enter the current year (2000 to 2099).  
Year  
Month  
Enter the current month (1 to 12).  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Administrator Settings  
Item  
Description  
Day  
Enter the current day (1 to 31).  
Date Format  
Select the date format from [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or  
[YYYY/MM/DD].  
Set Time  
Item  
Description  
Time Format  
Time (AM/PM)  
hour (0-23)  
hour (1-12)  
min. (0-59)  
Select 24- or 12-hour time format.  
Select [AM] or [PM] if 12-hour time format is selected.  
Enter the current hour if 24-hour time format is selected (0-23).  
Enter the current hour if 12-hour time format is selected (1-12).  
Enter the current minute (0-59).  
Energy Saver Mode Tab  
Energy Saver Mode  
Item  
Description  
Energy Saver Mode 1  
Select [Active] to set the machine to enter Energy Saver mode 1 if the  
machine has been idle for about 30 seconds.  
It takes less time to recover from Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off  
state or Energy Saver mode 2, but power consumption is higher in Energy  
Saver mode 1 than in Energy Saver mode 2.  
Energy Saver Mode 2  
Select [Active] to set the machine to enter Energy Saver mode 2 after the  
period of time specified for [Waiting Time (1 min. - 240 min.)] is passed (1  
to 240 minutes).  
The machine consumes less power in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy  
Saver mode 1, but it takes longer to recover from Energy Saver mode 2  
than from Energy Saver mode 1.  
• The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a print job, prints a received fax,  
or when the [Copy], [Color Start], or [B&W Start] key is pressed.  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor  
PCL6 Mode  
PCL6 Mode  
Item  
Description  
PCL6 Mode  
Set this to [Universal] when using the Universal Driver and to [SP C250/  
C252] when using the normal driver.  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9. Maintaining the Machine  
Replacing the Print Cartridge  
• Store print cartridge in a cool dark place.  
• Actual printable numbers vary depending on image volume and density, number of pages printed  
at a time, paper type and size, and environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity.  
Toner quality degrades over time. Early replacement of the print cartridge might be necessary.  
Therefore, we recommend you always keep a new print cartridge ready.  
• For good print quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the  
manufacturer.  
• The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use  
of parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.  
• If you try to print while the message "Replacement Required: Toner Cartridge (XX)" is being  
displayed, another message "Continue printing?" may appear. If this happens, you can print a few  
pages by pressing [Yes], although the print quality may be lower. Replace the toner as soon as  
possible. If the message "Continue printing?" does not appear, replace the toner immediately.  
Messages on the screen  
• Replace the indicated print cartridge when any of the following messages appear on the  
screen:  
"Replacement Required: Toner Cartridge" (XX)  
("XX" indicates the toner color)  
• Prepare the indicated print cartridge when any of the following messages appear on the  
screen:  
"Replace Required Soon: Toner Cartridge" (XX)  
("XX" indicates the toner color)  
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small objects to fall inside the machine.  
• Do not expose the print cartridge without its cover to direct sunlight for a long time.  
• Do not touch the print cartridge's photo conductor unit.  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
9. Maintaining the Machine  
DAC045  
• Do not touch the ID chip on the side of the print cartridge as shown below.  
DAC046  
• When removing print cartridges, be careful not to touch the laser scanning unit under the upper  
cover (the position shown by the arrow in the illustration below).  
DAC044  
• If cyan, magenta, or yellow toner runs out, you can print in black and white using just the black  
toner. Change the color mode setting to Black and White using the machine's driver.  
• If black toner runs out, you cannot print in black and white or color until the black print cartridge is  
replaced.  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Print Cartridge  
1. Pull up the lever on the top cover, and then carefully raise the top cover.  
DAC063  
2. Carefully lift out the print cartridge vertically, holding its center.  
From the rear, the print cartridges are installed in the order of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y),  
and black (K).  
DAC040  
• Do not shake the removed print cartridge. Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak.  
• Place the old print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace.  
• The toner color is indicated by the label on each print cartridge.  
3. Take the new print cartridge out of the box, and then take it out of the plastic bag.  
DAC036  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Maintaining the Machine  
4. Hold the print cartridge and shake it from side to side five or six times.  
DAC039  
Even distribution of toner within the bottle improves print quality.  
5. Remove the protective cover from the print cartridge.  
DAC037  
6. Check the toner color and corresponding location, and then carefully insert the print  
cartridge vertically.  
DAC043  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Print Cartridge  
7. Using both hands, hold the center of the top cover and close the cover carefully. Be  
careful not to trap your fingers.  
DAC064  
8. Attach the protective cover you removed in Step 5 on the old print cartridge. Then, put the  
old print cartridge into the bag, and then put it into the box.  
DAC038  
• Make sure to cover the old print cartridge with the protective cover for recycling and environmental  
purposes.  
• Comply with the print cartridge recycling program, whereby used print cartridges are collected for  
processing. For details, ask your sales or service representative.  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Maintaining the Machine  
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle  
Messages on the screen  
• Replace the waste toner bottle when the following message appears on the screen:  
"Replace: Waste Toner Bottle"  
• Prepare a waste toner bottle when the following message appears on the screen:  
"Almost Full Waste Toner Bottle"  
• Waste toner bottles cannot be reused.  
• For easy replacement, we recommend you purchase and store extra waste toner bottles.  
• When removing the waste toner bottle, make sure not to tilt it.  
• Make sure the transfer unit is installed. If the transfer unit is not installed, install it before turning on  
the power.  
• Comply with the waste toner bottle recycling program, whereby used waste toner bottles are  
collected for processing. For details, ask your sales or service representative.  
• Before removing the waste toner bottle from the machine, spread paper or similar material around  
the area to keep toner from dirtying your workspace.  
1. Pull the front cover open lever and then carefully lower the front cover.  
2
1
DAC061  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle  
2. Slide both levers on the front cover forward.  
DAC089  
3. Holding the tabs on both ends of the transfer unit, tilt it backwards and lift it up.  
2
1
DAC088  
4. Holding the handle at the center of the waste toner bottle, carefully pull it partially out  
without tilting it.  
DAC076  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Maintaining the Machine  
5. Pull the waste toner bottle halfway out, hold the bottle firmly, and then pull it straight out.  
DAC077  
DAC078  
To prevent the waste toner bottle from coming into contact with the intermediate transfer unit (the  
position shown by the arrow in the illustration below), do not lift the bottle while pulling it out.  
DAC081  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle  
6. Close the bottle cap.  
DAC083  
DAC082  
7. Holding the center of the new waste toner bottle, carefully insert it halfway into the  
machine body.  
Leave the bottle cap open.  
DAC079  
To prevent the waste toner bottle from coming into contact with the intermediate transfer unit (the  
position shown by the arrow in the illustration below), do not lift the bottle while inserting it.  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Maintaining the Machine  
DAC080  
8. Push in the waste toner bottle until it clicks.  
Pressing the handle at the center, push the bottle all the way in.  
DAC075  
9. Place the transfer unit on the front cover. Slide the transfer unit along the guide rails into  
the machine.  
DAC086  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle  
10. When it stops, push on the PUSH mark until it clicks.  
DAC087  
11. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.  
DAC062  
• When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly.  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Maintaining the Machine  
Replacing a Component  
Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Unit  
• This function is available for the Type 2 model only.  
If the Alert indicator on the control panel lights up and the "Replacement Required: Intermediate Transfer  
Unit" message appears on the display, contact your sales or service representative.  
Replacing the Fusing Unit and Transfer Roller  
• This function is available for the Type 2 model only.  
If the Alert indicator on the control panel lights up and the "Replacement Required: Transfer Roller" or  
"Replacement Required: Fusing Unit" message appears on the display, contact your sales or service  
representative.  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Cautions When Cleaning  
Cautions When Cleaning  
Clean the machine periodically to maintain high print quality.  
Dry wipe the exterior with a soft cloth. If it is not sufficient, wipe with a soft, damp cloth that has been  
wrung out thoroughly. If you still cannot remove the stain or grime, use a neutral detergent, wipe over  
the area with a thoroughly-wrung damp cloth, and then dry wipe the area and allow it to dry.  
• To avoid deformation, discoloration, or cracking, do not use volatile chemicals, such as benzine  
and thinner, or spray insecticide on the machine.  
• If there is dust or grime inside the machine, wipe with a clean, dry cloth.  
• Disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year. Clean away any dust and grime from  
the plug and outlet before reconnecting. Accumulated dust and grime may cause fire.  
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small objects to fall inside the machine.  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9. Maintaining the Machine  
Cleaning the Toner Density Sensor  
Clean the toner density sensor when the following message appears on the control panel.  
"Density Sensor Require Cleaning"  
1. Pull up the lever on the top cover, and then carefully raise the top cover.  
Make sure that the ADF is closed.  
DAC063  
2. Remove the rearmost print cartridge.  
DAC040  
3. Slide the toner density sensor lever once to the left.  
DAC093  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cleaning the Toner Density Sensor  
4. Carefully insert the print cartridge removed in Step 2 vertically.  
DAC043  
5. Using both hands, hold the center of the top cover and close the cover carefully. Be  
careful not to trap your fingers.  
DAC064  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Maintaining the Machine  
Cleaning the Friction Pad and Paper Feed  
Roller  
If the friction pad or paper feed roller is dirty, a multi-feed or misfeed might occur. In this case, clean the  
friction pad and paper feed roller as follows:  
• Do not use chemical cleaning fluids or organic solvents such as thinner or benzine.  
1. Turn off the power.  
2. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Remove all the cables from the machine.  
3. Pull out Tray 1 carefully with both hands.  
DAC070  
Place the tray on a flat surface. If there is paper in the tray, remove it.  
4. Wipe the friction pad with a damp cloth.  
DAC057  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cleaning the Friction Pad and Paper Feed Roller  
5. Wipe the rubber part of the roller with a soft damp cloth. After that, wipe it with a dry  
cloth to remove the moisture.  
DAC068  
6. Push the metal plate down until it clicks.  
DAC050  
7. Reload the removed paper into the tray, and then push the tray carefully into the machine  
until it clicks.  
DAC069  
8. Insert the plug of the power cord into the wall socket securely. Connect all the cables that  
were removed.  
9. Turn on the power.  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Maintaining the Machine  
• paper jam or multi-sheet feed still occurs after cleaning the friction pad, contact your sales or  
service representative.  
• If the optional Tray 2 is installed, clean its friction pad and paper feed roller in the same way as  
you did for Tray 1.  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Registration Roller and Paper Tray  
Cleaning the Registration Roller and Paper  
Tray  
The registration roller and paper tray can become dirty with paper dust if you print to non-standard  
paper.  
Clean the registration roller if white dots appear on prints.  
• Do not use chemical cleaning fluids or organic solvents such as thinner or benzine.  
• Do not touch the transfer roller (as shown below).  
DAC091  
1. Turn off the power.  
2. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Remove all the cables from the machine.  
3. Pull out Tray 1 carefully with both hands.  
DAC070  
Place the tray on a flat surface. If there is paper in the tray, remove it.  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9. Maintaining the Machine  
4. Wipe the inside of the paper tray with a cloth.  
DAC060  
5. Push the metal plate down until it clicks.  
DAC050  
6. Reload the removed paper into the tray, and then push the tray carefully into the machine  
until it clicks.  
DAC069  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Registration Roller and Paper Tray  
7. Pull the front cover open lever and then carefully lower the front cover.  
2
1
DAC061  
Be sure to set the registration roller in the position shown by the arrow in the illustration below.  
DAC085  
Clean the registration roller if prints are smeared after a paper jam is cleared.  
8. Clean the registration roller by applying a soft damp cloth while turning it.  
9. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.  
DAC062  
10. Plug in the power cord securely. Connect all the cables that were removed.  
11. Turn on the power.  
• When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly.  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Maintaining the Machine  
Cleaning the Exposure Glass and ADF  
Cleaning the Exposure Glass  
1. Lift the ADF.  
Be careful not to hold the input tray when Doing so may damage the tray.  
2. Clean the parts indicated by arrows with a soft damp cloth and then wipe the same parts  
with a dry cloth to remove any remaining moisture.  
DAC004  
Cleaning the ADF  
The following procedure describes how to clean the ADF.  
1. Lift the ADF.  
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, Doing so may damage the tray.  
2. Clean the parts indicated by arrows with a soft damp cloth and then wipe the same parts  
with a dry cloth to remove any remaining moisture.  
DAC005  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
10. Troubleshooting  
Removing Paper Jams  
If a paper jam occurs, one of the following messages appears on the control panel:  
• If the alert indicator lights up continuously or flashes, switch to copier mode and check the  
displayed message.  
Message  
Reference title  
Internal Misfeed  
Misfeed: Stnd. Tray  
Misfeed: Paper Tray  
Misfeed: Tray 1  
Misfeed: Tray 2  
Misfeed: Dup. Unit  
Remove Paper  
ADF Orig. Misfeed  
Open ADF Cover and  
Remove paper.  
See the section identified by the message and remove the jammed paper accordingly.  
Removing Printing Jams  
• The inside of this machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts labeled " " (indicating a  
hot surface).  
• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when  
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
10. Troubleshooting  
• Jammed paper may be covered in toner. Be careful not to get toner on your hands or clothes.  
• Toner on prints made immediately after clearing a paper jam may be insufficiently fused and may  
smudge. Make test prints until smudges no longer appear.  
• Do not forcefully remove jammed paper, as it may tear. Torn pieces remaining inside the machine  
will cause further jams and possibly damage the machine.  
• Paper jam can cause pages to be lost. Check your print job for missing pages and reprint any  
pages that did not print out.  
If paper jams inside the fusing unit  
If paper jams inside the fusing unit, follow the procedure below to remove it.  
• Since the temperature around the guide is high, wait for it to cool down before checking for  
jammed paper.  
1. Pull the front cover open lever and then carefully lower the front cover.  
2
1
DAC061  
2. Lower the fusing unit lever, and pull out the jammed paper carefully.  
DAC340  
Do not touch the fusing unit.  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Removing Paper Jams  
DAC605  
Pull the paper downward to remove it. Do not pull it upward.  
DAC074  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, check for it by pulling down the guide.  
DAC073  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
3. Pull up the fusing unit levers.  
DAC071  
4. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.  
DAC062  
• When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly. After closing the cover,  
check that the error is cleared.  
If paper jams inside a tray  
If paper jams in Tray 1 or 2, follow the procedure below to remove it.  
1. Pull the front cover open lever and then carefully lower the front cover.  
2
1
DAC061  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Removing Paper Jams  
2. Pull out the jammed paper carefully.  
DAC084  
Do not touch the fusing unit.  
DAC605  
If paper has jammed inside the transfer unit, holding both sides of the paper, pull the paper  
carefully forward and out.  
DAC092  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
3. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.  
DAC062  
• Do not pull out the paper tray (Tray 1).  
• If paper is jammed in Tray 2 but is difficult to locate, pull out Tray 2 to remove it. After removing the  
paper, carefully push Tray 2 all the way back inside the machine.  
• When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly. After closing the cover,  
check that the error is cleared.  
If paper jams inside the transfer unit  
If paper jams inside the transfer unit, follow the procedure below to remove it.  
1. Pull the front cover open lever and then carefully lower the front cover.  
2
1
DAC061  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Removing Paper Jams  
2. Carefully remove any paper that is jammed under the transfer unit.  
DAC090  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, look inside the machine.  
3. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.  
DAC062  
• When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly. After closing the cover,  
check that the error is cleared.  
Removing Scanning Jams  
If a paper jam occurs in the ADF, follow the procedure below to remove the jammed paper.  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10. Troubleshooting  
1. Open the ADF cover.  
DAC011  
2. Gently pull the jammed paper to remove it.  
Be careful not to pull the original too hard, as it may rip.  
DAC013  
3. Close the ADF cover and the cover of the input tray for ADF.  
DAC012  
4. Lift the ADF, and if there is any original remaining in the ADF, gently pull the jammed  
paper to remove it.  
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF. Doing so may damage the tray.  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing Paper Jams  
DAC002  
5. Close the ADF.  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Common Problems  
This section explains how to troubleshoot common problems that may occur while operating the  
machine.  
Problem  
Possible cause  
Solution  
The machine does not turn on.  
The power cord is not  
connected properly.  
• Make sure that the power  
plug is firmly inserted into  
the wall outlet.  
• Make sure that the wall  
outlet is not defective by  
connecting another  
working device.  
The alert indicator lights up  
continuously or flashes.  
An error has occurred.  
An error has occurred.  
Switch to copier mode, check  
the displayed message, and  
troubleshoot the problem  
accordingly.  
An error message appears on  
the machine's screen.  
Pages are not printed.  
The machine is warming up or  
receiving data.  
Wait until "Printing..." appears  
on the screen. If "Processing..."  
is displayed on the screen, the  
machine is receiving data.  
Pages are not printed.  
Strange noise is heard.  
The interface cable is not  
connected correctly.  
• Reconnect the cable.  
• Check that the interface  
cable is the correct type.  
• The supplies or options are Check if the supplies or options  
not properly installed.  
are properly installed.  
• The machine executes  
periodic cleaning of the  
interior when [Auto  
The noise does not indicate a  
malfunction. Wait until the  
cleaning is complete.  
Cleaning] in [System  
Settings] is set to [On].  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Common Problems  
Problem  
Possible cause  
Solution  
The volume of the sounds  
produced by the machine is too level.  
loud.  
The volume is set to the high  
Adjust the volume of the beep,  
ring, speaker, and alarm  
sounds. For details, see  
The volume of the sounds  
The volume is muted or set to the Adjust the volume of the beep,  
produced by the machine is too low level.  
low.  
ring, speaker, and alarm  
sounds. For details, see  
• If any of these problems persist, turn off the power, pull out the power cord, and contact your sales  
or service representative.  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Paper Feed Problems  
If the machine is operating but paper will not feed or paper jams frequently, check the condition of the  
machine and paper.  
Problem  
Solution  
Paper does not feed smoothly.  
• Load paper correctly, making sure that the paper guides  
• If the paper is curled, straighten the paper.  
• Take out the paper from the tray and fan it well. Then,  
reverse the top and bottom of the paper, and put it back  
in the tray.  
Paper jams frequently.  
• If there are gaps between the paper and paper guides,  
adjust the paper guides to remove the gaps.  
• Avoid printing on both sides of paper when printing  
images that contain large solid areas, which consume a  
large amount of toner.  
• Load paper only as high as the upper limit markings on  
the paper guide.  
• Make sure that the friction pads, paper feed rollers or  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Feed Problems  
Problem  
Solution  
Multiple sheets of paper are fed at  
once.  
• Fan the paper well before loading. Also make sure that  
the edges are aligned by tapping the stack on a flat  
surface such as a desk.  
• Make sure that the paper guides are in the right position.  
• Load paper only as high as the upper limit markings on  
the paper guide.  
• Make sure that the friction pads, paper feed rollers or  
• Check that paper was not added while there was still  
some left in the tray.  
Only add paper when there is none left in the tray.  
The printed paper is wrinkled.  
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has  
• If there are gaps between the paper and the paper  
guides, adjust the paper guides to remove the gaps.  
• Check that both the left and right fusing unit levers have  
been raised to the plain paper mark.  
The printed paper is curled.  
• Load the paper upside down in the paper tray.  
• If the paper curl is severe, retrieve prints from the output  
tray more frequently.  
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has  
• Select [Lvl.2: Medium] or [Lvl.3: Strong] in [Anti-Humidity  
Level] under [System Settings]. Note that if you select [Lvl.  
2: Medium] or [Lvl.3: Strong], the first print takes longer  
than subsequent prints.  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Solution  
Images are not printed in the right  
position  
• Adjust the front end paper guide and both side paper  
guides to match the paper size.  
DAC606  
Images are printed diagonally to the If there are gaps between the paper and the paper guides,  
pages.  
adjust the paper guides to remove the gaps.  
DAC572  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print Quality Problems  
Print Quality Problems  
Checking the Condition of the Machine  
If there is a problem with the print quality, first check the condition of the machine.  
Problem  
Solution  
There is a problem with the  
machine's location.  
Make sure that the machine is on a level surface. Place the  
machine where it will not be subject to vibration or shock.  
Unsupported types of paper is used. Make sure that the paper being used is supported by the  
The paper type setting is incorrect.  
Make sure that the paper type setting of the printer driver  
A non-genuine print cartridge is  
being used.  
Refilled or non-genuine print cartridge reduces print quality  
and may cause malfunctions. Use genuine print cartridge only.  
An old print cartridge is being used. Print cartridge should be opened before their expiration date  
and used within six months after being opened.  
The machine is dirty.  
machine as required.  
Color degradation has occurred.  
Color degradation may occur in color printing after the  
machine is moved or a large number of pages are printed. In  
this case, adjust color registration by executing [Color  
Registration] in [System Settings].  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
10. Troubleshooting  
Checking the printer driver settings  
Problem  
Solution  
The printed image is smudged.  
PCL 5c/6  
On the printer driver's [Paper] tab, select [Bypass Tray] in  
the "Input Tray:" list. In the "Paper Type:" list, select a  
proper paper type.  
PostScript 3  
On the printer driver's [Paper/Quality] tab, select  
[Bypass Tray] in the "Paper Source" list. In the "Media"  
list, select a proper paper type.  
Images smudge when rubbed.  
(Toner is not fixed.)  
PCL 5c/6  
On the printer driver's [Paper] tab, select a proper paper  
type in the "Paper Type:" list.  
PostScript 3  
On the printer driver's [Paper/Quality] tab, select a  
proper paper type in the "Media" list.  
The printed image is different from  
the image on the computer's display.  
Only when using PCL 5c/6  
On the printer driver's [Print Quality] tab, select [Raster]  
in the "Graphics Mode" list.  
When printing graphics, the output  
and the screen are different.  
To print accurately, specify the printer driver setting to print  
without using the graphics command. For details about  
specifying the printer driver setting, see the printer driver Help.  
Images are cut off, or excess is  
printed.  
Use the same size paper selected in the application. If you  
cannot load paper of the correct size, use the reduction  
function to reduce the image, and then print. For details about  
the reduction function, see the printer driver Help.  
Photo images are coarse.  
Use the application's or printer driver's settings to specify a  
higher resolution.  
For details about the printer driver's settings, see the printer  
driver Help.  
A solid line is printed as a dashed  
line or appears blurred.  
Change the dithering settings on the printer driver. For details  
about the dithering settings, see the printer driver Help.  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Print Quality Problems  
Problem  
Solution  
Fine lines are fuzzy, of inconsistent  
thickness, or do not appear.  
Change the dithering settings on the printer driver. For details  
about the dithering settings, see the printer driver Help.  
If the problem persists, specify the settings of the application in  
which the image was created to change the thickness of the  
lines.  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Printer Problems  
This section describes printing problems and possible solutions.  
When You Cannot Print Properly  
Problem  
Solution  
An error occurs.  
If an error occurs when printing, change the computer or  
printer driver settings.  
• Check the printer icon name does not exceed 32  
alphanumeric characters. If it does, shorten it.  
• Check whether other applications are operating.  
Close any other applications, as they may be interfering  
with printing. If the problem is not resolved, close  
unneeded processes too.  
• Check that the latest printer driver is being used.  
A print job is canceled.  
• Printing on Legal size paper may be canceled, if the  
printing is performed with a certain print quality setting. If  
using the PCL printer driver, set [Gradation:] in [Print  
Quality] to [Speed] or [Standard]. If using the PostScript  
3 printer driver, set [Print Quality] to [Standard] or [High  
Quality]. For details, see the printer driver Help.  
• If [I/O Timeout] under [System Settings] is set to 15  
seconds, increase the time period. A print job may be  
canceled if printing is frequently interrupted by data from  
other ports, or if printing data is large and takes time for  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printer Problems  
Problem  
Solution  
A Locked Print file is canceled.  
• The machine already has 5 jobs or 5 MB of Locked Print  
data. Print or delete an existing Locked Print file. For  
• Even if the machine cannot store any more Locked Print  
files, the machine holds the new Locked Print file for the  
period of time specified in [Locked Print] under [System  
Settings] before canceling that file. Within this time, you  
can print or delete the new Locked Print file. You can also  
print or delete an existing Locked Print file so that the new  
Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.  
Only when using PCL 5c/6  
The Locked Print file has too many pages or it is too large.  
Reduce the number of pages to print, or print with a  
lower setting for [Gradation:] in [Print Quality]. For  
details, see the printer driver Help.  
There is a considerable delay  
between the print start command  
and actual printing.  
• Processing time depends on data volume. High volume  
data, such as graphics-heavy documents, take longer to  
be processed.  
• To speed up printing, reduce the printing resolution using  
the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.  
• The machine is calibrating color. Wait for a while.  
Documents are not printed properly Change the print quality settings.  
when using a certain application, or  
image data is not printed properly.  
Some characters are printed faintly  
or not printed.  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Solution  
It takes too long to complete the print  
job.  
• Photographs and other data intensive pages take a long  
time to be processed so simply wait when printing such  
data.  
• Changing the settings with printer driver may help to  
speed up printing.  
See the printer driver Help.  
• The data is so large or complex that it takes a long time  
to be processed.  
• If "Processing..." is displayed on the screen, the machine  
is receiving data. Wait for a while.  
• The printer is adjusting the color registration. Wait for a  
while.  
A printed image is different from the  
image on the computer's display.  
• When you use some functions, such as enlargement and  
reduction, the layout of the image might be different from  
that displayed in the computer display.  
• Check that the page layout settings are properly  
configured in the application.  
• Make sure the paper size selected in the printer  
properties dialog box matches the size of the paper  
loaded. For details, see the printer driver Help.  
Images are cut off, or excess pages If you are using paper whose size is smaller than the paper  
are printed.  
size selected in the application, use the same size paper  
selected in the application. If you cannot load paper of the  
correct size, use the reduction function to reduce the image,  
and then print.  
See the printer driver Help.  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Problems  
Problem  
Solution  
The color of the printout is different  
from the color on the computer's  
display.  
• The colors made using color toner may be different from  
colors displayed on the display due to the difference of  
methods to reproduce colors.  
Only when using PCL 5c/6  
• Color gradation might appear differently if [On] is  
selected for [Economy Color] on the [Print Quality]  
tab in the printer driver's dialog box.  
See the printer driver Help.  
• Turn off the main power, and then turn it back on. If the  
color still appears different on the printout, perform the  
[Color Registration] under [System Settings]. For details,  
If this procedure fails to resolve the problem, contact your  
sales or service representative.  
Color changes extremely when  
adjusted with the printer driver.  
Only when using PCL 5c/6  
Do not make extreme settings for the color balance under  
the [Print Quality] tab in the printer driver's dialog box.  
See the printer driver Help.  
Color documents are printed in  
black and white.  
• The printer driver is not set up for color printing.  
See the printer driver Help.  
• Some applications print color files in black and white.  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
When You Cannot Print Clearly  
Problem  
Solution  
The whole printout is blurred.  
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has  
• Select [Lvl.1: Weak], [Lvl.2: Medium] or [Lvl.3: Strong] in  
[Anti-Humidity Level] under [System Settings]. Note that if  
you select [Lvl.2: Medium] or [Lvl.3: Strong], the first print  
takes longer than subsequent prints.  
• If you enable [Toner Saving] under [System Settings],  
printing is generally less dense.  
• If you select [On] for [Economy Color] in the [Print  
Quality] tab (PCL printer driver) or under [Printer  
Features] (PostScript 3 printer driver), print will be at  
lower density. For details, see the printer driver Help.  
• The print cartridge is almost empty. If "Replace Toner: X"  
("X" indicates the toner color) appears on the screen,  
replace the indicated print cartridge.  
• Condensation may have occurred. If rapid change in  
temperature or humidity occurs, use this machine only  
after it has acclimatized.  
The toner is powdery and comes  
Check if the fusing unit levers are properly set. Pull up the  
away from the paper, or the printed fusing unit levers.  
image has a matt appearance.  
Toner smears appear on the print  
side of the page.  
• The paper setting may not be correct. For example,  
although you are using thick paper, the setting for thick  
paper may not be specified.  
Check the printer driver's paper settings.  
See the printer driver Help.  
• Check that the paper is not curled or bent. Envelopes can  
be curled easily. Flatten out the paper before loading it.  
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer Problems  
Problem  
White lines appear.  
Solution  
The intermediate transfer belt is dirty.  
Follow the procedure below to clean the belt:  
1. Open the top cover while the power is on.  
2. Remove all print cartridges from the printer.  
3. Close the top cover with both hands carefully.  
4. When cleaning finishes, open the top cover and attach  
all the print cartridges again.  
DAC607  
If this procedure does not resolve the problem, contact your  
sales or service representative.  
Horizontal lines appear on the  
printed paper.  
• Impact can cause lines to appear on printed paper and  
other malfunctions.  
Protect the printer from impact at all times, especially  
while it is printing.  
• If lines appear on prints, turn the printer off, wait a few  
moments, and then turn it back on again. Then, perform  
the print job again.  
The print color is different from the  
color specified.  
If a specific color is missing, turn the power switch off and on.  
If this does not resolve the problem, contact your sales or  
service representative.  
Photo images are coarse.  
Some applications lower the resolution for making prints.  
A color is missing or a printed image  
is partially blurred.  
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has  
been stored properly.  
• Toner is almost empty. If the following message appears  
on the control panel, replace the print cartridge:  
"Replace Toner: X". ("X" indicates the toner color)  
• Condensation may have occurred. If rapid change in  
temperature or humidity occurs, use this printer only after  
it has acclimatized.  
Color shift occurs.  
Perform the [Color Registration] under [System Settings].  
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Problem  
White spots appear.  
Solution  
The surrounding registration roller or paper tray can become  
dirty with paper dust if you use paper other than standard  
paper.  
Wipe any paper dust off both the paper tray and registration  
roller.  
Colorless dots appear on solid color Change the paper type currently selected in the Paper Type  
printouts.  
settings, and then print.  
Eg. [Recycled Paper] to [Thin Paper] to [Plain Paper].  
White streaks or color streaks  
appear.  
Toner is almost empty. If an error message appears on the  
control panel, replace the print cartridge of the color  
indicated.  
The backs of printed sheets are  
blemished.  
• When removing a jammed sheet, the inside of the printer  
may have become dirty. Print several sheets until they  
come out clean.  
• If document size is larger than paper size, e.g. A4  
document on B5 paper, the back of the next printed sheet  
may become dirty.  
Black gradation is not natural.  
Only when using PostScript 3  
Select [CMY + K] for [Gray Reproduction] in the printer  
driver's dialog box.  
See the printer driver Help.  
Solid lines are printed as broken  
lines.  
Only when using PostScript 3  
Change the [Dithering] setting in the printer driver's  
dialog box.  
See the printer driver Help.  
318  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Problems  
Problem  
Solution  
Only when using PostScript 3  
Fine dot patterns do not print.  
Change the [Dithering] setting in the printer driver's  
dialog box.  
See the printer driver Help.  
Solid areas, lines or text are shiny or Only when using PostScript 3  
glossy when created as a mixture of  
cyan, magenta, yellow.  
Select [Black by K] for [Gray Reproduction] in the printer  
driver's dialog box.  
See the printer driver Help.  
Speckling occurs in areas of solid  
black print.  
Only when using PostScript 3  
Select [CMY + K] for [Gray Reproduction] in the printer  
driver's dialog box.  
See the printer driver Help.  
If rubbed with your finger, the print  
smears.  
The setting of the paper may not be correct. For example,  
although thick paper is used, the setting for thick paper may  
not be specified.  
• Check the paper settings of this printer.  
• Check the paper settings of the printer driver.  
See the printer driver Help.  
When Paper Is Not Fed Properly  
Problem  
Solution  
Prints fall behind the machine when  
they are delivered.  
Pull up the appropriate stop fence (forward fence for A4/  
319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10. Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Prints do not stack properly.  
Solution  
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has  
• Select [Lvl.2: Medium] or [Lvl.3: Strong] in [Anti-Humidity  
Level] under [System Settings]. Note that if you select [Lvl.  
2: Medium] or [Lvl.3: Strong], the first print takes longer  
than subsequent prints.  
• Pull up the appropriate stop fence (forward fence for  
The printed paper is curled.  
• Load the paper upside down in the paper tray.  
• If the paper curl is severe, retrieve prints from the output  
tray more frequently.  
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has  
been stored properly.  
• Select [Lvl.1: Weak], [Lvl.2: Medium] or [Lvl.3: Strong] in  
[Anti-Humidity Level] under [System Settings]. Note that if  
you select [Lvl.2: Medium] or [Lvl.3: Strong], the first print  
takes longer than subsequent prints.  
• If you enable [Toner Saving] under [System Settings],  
printing is generally less dense.  
Printed envelopes come out creased. Check if the fusing unit levers are properly set. Lower the fusing  
unit levers.  
Other Printing Problems  
Problem  
Solution  
The toner has run out and printing  
has stopped.  
When the "Continue printing?" message appears on the  
control panel, pressing [Yes] allows you to print a few more  
pages, but the print quality of those pages may be lower.  
320  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copier Problems  
Copier Problems  
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies  
Problem  
Solution  
The original is not placed correctly.  
The printed copy is blank.  
When using the exposure glass, place originals copy side  
down. When using the ADF, place them copy side up. See  
The wrong original was copied.  
If copying from the exposure glass, make sure that there are  
no originals in the ADF.  
Copied pages do not look the same Select the correct scan mode according to the type of original.  
as the originals.  
Black spots appear when  
The original may have stuck to the exposure glass due to high  
photocopying a photographic print. humidity.  
Place the original on the exposure glass, and then place two  
or three sheets of white paper on top of it. Leave the ADF open  
when copying.  
A moire pattern is produced.  
The printed copy is dirty.  
The original probably has heavily lined or dotted areas.  
Switching the setting for image quality between [Photo] and  
[Mixed] may eliminate the moire pattern.  
• Image density is too high.  
• Toner on the printed surface is not dry.  
Do not touch printed surfaces immediately after copying.  
Remove freshly printed sheets one by one, taking care  
not to touch printed areas.  
• Before placing originals on the exposure glass, make  
sure that toner or correction fluid is dry.  
321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
10. Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Solution  
When copying from the exposure  
glass, the print area of the copy is  
out of alignment with the original.  
Place the original copy side down, making sure that it is  
aligned to the rear left corner and pressed flat against the  
exposure glass.  
When You Cannot Make Copies as Wanted  
Problem  
Solution  
Photocopied pages are not in  
correct order.  
On the control panel, change the [Sort] setting under copy  
settings to collate pages as you require. For details about  
Copied pages are too dark or too  
light.  
Cannot make copies with  
satisfactory tones.  
Adjust the tone in [Color Adjustment] in Copier Features. You  
322  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanner Problems  
Scanner Problems  
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan File  
Problem  
Solution  
not be correct:  
• IP address  
• Subnet Mask  
When Scanning Is Not Done As Expected  
Problem  
Solution  
The machine does not start scanning. The ADF or its cover is open. Close the ADF or its cover.  
The scanned image is dirty.  
• Before placing originals on the exposure glass, make  
sure that toner or correction fluid is dry.  
The scanned image is distorted or  
out of position.  
The original was moved during scanning. Do not move the  
original during scanning.  
The scanned image is upside down. The original was placed upside down. Place the original in the  
The scanned image is blank.  
The original was placed with the front and back reversed.  
When using the exposure glass, place originals copy side  
down. When using the ADF, place originals copy side up. See  
The scanned image is too dark or  
too light.  
The Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or  
Scan to Folder function does not  
work.  
Check if a USB flash disk is inserted into the machine. If a USB  
flash disk is inserted, scanning functions other than Scan to  
USB are not available from the control panel.  
323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
10. Troubleshooting  
Fax Problems  
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax Messages As Wanted  
Transmission  
Problem  
Causes  
Solutions  
Cannot send files.  
The telephone line may be  
disconnected.  
Check if the telephone line is properly  
connected to the machine. For details,  
see Initial Guide for Fax.  
The machine cannot accept Wait until any of these faxes is  
a new fax job because there transmitted completely, or use the  
are 5 unsent faxes in  
memory already.  
[Delete TX Standby File] function to  
delete unnecessary faxes. For details,  
Document appears blank at The original was placed  
The original was placed upside down.  
Place the original in the correct  
the other end.  
upside down.  
Printed or sent images are  
spotty.  
The exposure glass,  
Clean them. For details about how to  
Make sure ink or correction fluid is dry  
before placing originals.  
exposure glass, exposure  
glass cover, or guide plate  
of the ADF is dirty.  
Reception is possible, but  
transmission is not.  
There are regions and  
telephone exchanges where representative.  
a dial tone cannot be  
Contact your sales or service  
detected.  
Transmission failed due to  
"maximum e-mail size"  
error.  
If the e-mail size specified  
on the machine is too large, Size] in [Scan Settings]. For details  
the Internet Fax document  
cannot be sent.  
Change the setting for [Max. E-mail  
about the maximum e-mail size, see  
324  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Fax Problems  
Problem  
Causes  
Solutions  
When using On Hook Dial, If the machine fails to detect Press [Scan Size] in [Scan Settings],  
"Receiving..." appears and the size of the original when select the scan size, and then resend the  
transmission is not allowed. the [B&W Start] key is  
pressed, it performs a  
document.  
receiving operation.  
LAN-Fax Driver does not  
work.  
The entered login user  
name, login password, or  
driver encryption key is  
incorrect.  
Check your login user name, login  
password, or driver encryption key,  
and then enter them correctly. For  
details, contact your administrator.  
Reception  
Problem  
Causes  
Solutions  
Cannot receive files.  
The telephone line may be  
disconnected.  
Check if the telephone line is properly  
connected to the machine. For details,  
see Initial Guide for Fax.  
The Receiving File indicator The machine cannot print  
• Load paper into the tray.  
• Add toner.  
lights up and the received  
document is not printed.  
because it is out of paper or  
toner.  
• The paper tray does not contain  
paper of the right size. Load paper  
of the right size in the paper tray.  
The machine does not print  
received fax documents.  
[Fax Features] is configured Print the fax documents using Web  
to store received  
documents.  
browser or the Print Stored RX File  
function. For details about printing  
received faxes stored in memory,  
The machine failed to print  
received fax documents.  
The paper has run out.  
Load paper into the tray.  
325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Printing  
Problem  
Causes  
Solutions  
Print is slanted.  
The paper is fed at a slant.  
Load the paper correctly. For details  
Misfeeds occur frequently.  
The number sheets loaded  
in the paper tray exceeds  
the capacity of the machine.  
Load paper only as high as the upper  
limit markings inside the paper tray.  
The paper tray's side guide Pinch the paper guide lightly, and then  
is set too tightly. adjust its position.  
The paper is too thick or too Use the recommended paper. For  
thin.  
details about the recommended paper,  
Printed paper is being used. Do not load sheets that have already  
been copied or printed.  
Sheets are sticking together. Fan the sheets thoroughly before  
loading them. Alternatively, feed the  
sheets into the machine one at a time.  
Printed copies are together, Sheets are sticking together. Fan the sheets thoroughly before  
resulting in jams.  
loading them. Alternatively, feed the  
sheets into the machine one at a time.  
Copy paper becomes  
creased.  
Printed paper is being used. Do not load sheets that have already  
been copied or printed.  
The paper is too thin.  
Use the recommended paper. For  
details about the recommended paper,  
Edges of sheets are  
creased.  
You are using a non-  
recommended paper.  
Use the recommended paper. For  
details about the recommended paper,  
Black lines appear on the  
file printed at the  
destination.  
The exposure glass,  
Clean the components. For details  
about how to clean the machine, see  
exposure glass, exposure  
glass cover, or guide plate  
of the ADF is dirty.  
326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Problems  
Problem  
Causes  
Solutions  
The background of received Image density is too high.  
images appears dirty.  
Adjust the image density. See  
Images from the back of the  
page appear.  
Received image is too light. When using moist, rough, or Use the recommended paper. For  
processed paper, areas of  
print may not be fully  
reproduced.  
details about the recommended paper,  
The image density has been Increase the image density. For details  
specified too low.  
about how to change the density, see  
The original of the  
transmitted fax was printed  
on paper that is too thin.  
Ask the sender to reprint the original on  
thicker paper, and then fax it again.  
When an Error Is Notified via a Report or E-mail  
When a report is printed from the machine  
Error Report  
An Error Report is printed if a document cannot be successfully sent or received.  
Possible causes include a problem with the machine or noise on the telephone line. If an error  
occurs during transmission, resend the original. If an error occurs during reception, ask the sender  
to resend the document.  
• If an error happens frequently, contact your service representative.  
• The "Page" column gives the total number of pages.  
Power Failure Report  
• Right after recovery from power failure, the internal battery needs to be sufficiently recharged  
to guard against future data loss. Keep the machine plugged in and the power on for about  
24 hours after the power loss.  
Even if the power is turned off, the contents of the machine memory (for example, programmed  
numbers) will not be lost. Lost items will include any fax documents stored in memory using Memory  
Transmission or Reception.  
If a file deleted from memory, Power Failure Report is automatically printed as soon as the power is  
restored.  
327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10. Troubleshooting  
This report can be used to identify lost files. If a document stored for Memory Transmission was lost,  
resend it. If a document received by Memory Reception was lost, ask the sender to resend it.  
Error Report (E-mail)  
The Error Report (E-mail) is printed by the machine when it is unable to send an Error notification  
Email.  
Transmission Error Report  
The Transmission Error Report is printed by the machine when it is unable to send a Transmission  
When an error notification E-mail is received  
Error notification e-mail  
The machine sends the Error Notification Email to the sender when it is unable to successfully  
receive a particular e-mail message by Internet Fax Function. A "cc" of this notification is also sent  
to the administrator's e-mail address if the address has been specified.  
• If an incoming Internet Fax from another party bypasses the SMTP server, even if reception is  
not successful, an Error Mail Notification is not sent to the sender.  
• You can select to send Error Notification Email using Web Image Monitor. For details, see  
• If Error Notification Email cannot be sent, the Error Report (E-mail) is printed by the machine.  
• If an error occurs when an e-mail is received via SMTP, the SMTP server sends an error  
notification e-mail to the originator of the document.  
Server-generated error e-mail  
The transmitting server sends this error e-mail to the originator of an e-mail that has failed to be  
transmitted successfully (due to reasons such as specifying an incorrect e-mail address).  
• If an Internet Fax transmission bypasses the SMTP server, even if transmission is not successful,  
an error e-mail is not sent from the server.  
• After a server-generated error e-mail is printed, the first page of the sent document is printed.  
Transmission Error Mail Notification  
If an e-mail fails to be sent due to a transmission error, the machine sends the Transmission Error  
Mail Notification to the sender. If an e-mail could not be sent using the forward function, the  
Transmission Error Mail Notification will be sent to the destination e-mail address for forwarding.  
If there is an additional user-registered e-mail address or administrator e-mail address, the  
Transmission Error Mail Notification will be sent to that address.  
328  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax Problems  
• If Transmission Error Mail Notification cannot be sent, Transmission Error Report is printed by  
the machine.  
Error Code  
The table below describes the meaning of error codes that appear under "Results" on Fax Journal or  
transmission status report, and what to do when a particular error code appears.  
"X" indicates a number in an error code that appear differently depending on the situation.  
Error Code  
Solution  
1XXX11  
1XXX21  
An original has been jammed inside the ADF while sending a  
fax in Immediate Transmission mode.  
• Remove jammed originals, and then place them again.  
• Check the originals are suitable for scanning. See  
The line could not be connected correctly.  
• Check if the telephone line is properly connected to the  
machine.  
• Disconnect the telephone line cord from the machine,  
and connect the cord to a telephone. Check if you can  
make calls using the telephone. If you cannot make calls  
this way, contact your telephone company.  
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service  
representative.  
1XXX22 to 1XXX23  
Dial fails when trying to send faxes.  
• Check if that the fax number you dialed is correct.  
• Check if that the destination is a fax machine.  
• Check if that the line is not busy.  
• You may need to insert a pause between dial digits. Press  
the [Pause/Redial] key after, for example, the area code.  
• Check if [PSTN / PBX] under [Admin. Tools] has been  
specified properly for your connection method to the  
329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10. Troubleshooting  
Error Code  
1XXX32 to 1XXX84  
Solution  
An error occurred while sending a fax.  
• Check if the telephone line is properly connected to the  
machine.  
• Disconnect the telephone line cord from the machine,  
and connect the cord to a telephone. Check if you can  
make calls using the telephone. If you cannot make calls  
this way, contact your telephone company.  
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service  
representative.  
2XXX14  
The machine was not able to print the received fax, or the  
machine's memory reached its capacity while receiving a fax  
because the document was too large.  
• The paper tray was empty. Load paper in the paper tray.  
• The tray selected in [Select Paper Tray] under [Fax  
Features] did not contain A4, Letter, or Legal size paper.  
Load valid size paper in the tray, and configure the  
paper size settings under [Tray Paper Settings]  
accordingly.  
• A cover or tray was open. Close the cover or tray.  
• There was a paper jam. Remove the jammed paper. See  
• A print cartridge was empty. Replace the print cartridge.  
• The received fax was too large. Ask the sender to re-send  
the document in parts as several smaller faxes, or to send  
the fax at a lower resolution.  
2XXX32 to 2XXX84  
An error occurred while receiving a fax.  
• Check if the telephone line is properly connected to the  
machine.  
• Disconnect the telephone line cord from the machine,  
and connect the cord to a telephone. Check if you can  
make calls using the telephone. If you cannot make calls  
this way, contact your telephone company.  
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service  
representative.  
330  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Problems  
Error Code  
Solution  
3XXX11  
Connection to the server failed while sending an Internet Fax.  
• Check if the network cable is properly connected to the  
machine.  
• Check if the network settings such as the IP address,  
DNS, and SMTP settings have been configured properly  
(make sure that no double-byte character is used). See  
3XXX12  
3XXX13  
3XXX14  
3XXX33  
E-mail transmission failed while sending an Internet Fax.  
• There was an error in the header of the e-mail. Check if  
the network settings such as the IP address, DNS, and  
SMTP settings have been configured properly (make sure  
E-mail transmission failed while sending an Internet Fax.  
• There was an error in the part header of the e-mail.  
Check if the network settings such as the IP address,  
DNS, and SMTP settings have been configured properly  
(make sure that no double-byte character is used). See  
E-mail transmission failed while sending an Internet Fax.  
• There was an error in the converted TIFF file. Check if the  
network settings such as the IP address, DNS, and SMTP  
settings have been configured properly (make sure that  
The machine memory reached capacity while sending an  
Internet Fax.  
• The fax was too large. Resend the document in parts as  
several smaller faxes, or send the fax at a lower  
resolution.  
331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Error Code  
Solution  
4XXX21  
Connection to the server failed while receiving an Internet Fax.  
• Check if the network cable is properly connected to the  
machine.  
• Check if the network settings such as the IP address,  
DNS, and POP3 settings have been configured properly  
(make sure that no double-byte character is used). See  
4XXX22  
4XXX23  
4XXX24  
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.  
• LIST command to the POP3 server failed. Ask the sender  
to check the e-mail settings.  
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.  
• There was an error in the header of the e-mail. Ask the  
sender to check the e-mail settings.  
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.  
• There was an error in the part header of the e-mail. Ask  
the sender to check the e-mail settings.  
• The e-mail had an invalid Content-Type, or an  
unsupported type of file (such as PDF or JPEG) was  
received. Ask the sender to check the file type.  
4XXX25  
4XXX26  
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.  
• There was an error in the text part of the part body of the  
e-mail. Ask the sender to check the e-mail settings.  
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.  
• There was an error in the received TIFF file (which  
resulted from a condition not indicated by the error codes  
4XXX43 to 4XXX45). Ask the sender to check the TIFF  
file.  
4XXX42  
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.  
• There was an error in the part header of the e-mail. Ask  
the sender to check the e-mail settings.  
332  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Problems  
Error Code  
Solution  
4XXX43  
4XXX44  
A TIFF file could not be received via Internet Fax properly.  
• The compression method of the received TIFF file was  
other than MH/MR/MMR. Ask the sender to check the  
TIFF file.  
A TIFF file could not be received via Internet Fax properly.  
• The resolution of the TIFF file was not supported, or the  
width of the TIFF file was that of A3 or B4 paper. Ask the  
sender to check the TIFF file.  
4XXX45  
4XXX46  
A TIFF file could not be received via Internet Fax properly.  
• The format of the TIFF file was other than TIFF-S/F. Ask  
the sender to check the TIFF file.  
The machine memory reached its capacity while receiving an  
Internet Fax.  
• The fax was too large. Ask the sender to resend the  
document in parts as several smaller faxes, or send at a  
lower resolution.  
333  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Error and Status Messages on the Screen  
Messages are listed in alphabetical order in the table below.  
"X" indicates the parts of the messages that appear differently depending on the situation, such as the  
paper size, paper type, and tray name.  
• If the alert indicator lights up continuously or flashes, switch to copier mode and check the  
displayed message.  
Message  
2XXX14  
Causes  
Solutions  
The machine was not able to  
print the received fax, or the  
machine's memory reached its  
capacity while receiving a fax  
because the document was too  
large.  
• The paper tray was empty. Load  
• The tray selected in [Select Paper  
Tray] under [Fax Features] did not  
contain A4, Letter, or Legal size  
paper. Load valid size paper in the  
tray, and then configure the paper  
size settings under [Tray Paper  
Settings] accordingly.  
• A cover or tray was open. Close the  
cover or tray.  
• There was a paper jam. Remove the  
• A print cartridge was empty. Replace  
• The received fax was too large. Ask  
the sender to resend the document in  
parts as several smaller faxes, or to  
send at a lower resolution.  
ADF Orig. Misfeed  
An original has been jammed  
inside the ADF.  
• Remove jammed originals, and then  
Open ADF Cover  
and  
• Check the originals are suitable for  
Remove paper.  
334  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Error and Status Messages on the Screen  
Message  
Causes  
Solutions  
Available: 2 Sided  
Copy  
A4/B5/LG/LT/EXE does not contain the valid size  
8x13/8.25x13/8.5 paper, which are A4, B5, Letter,  
2-sided copy could not be  
performed because the tray  
• Select the tray containing the A4, B5,  
Letter, Legal, or Executive size paper  
(other than the bypass tray) in the  
x13/16K  
Legal, Executive, 8 × 13 inches,  
1
8 / × 13 inches, Folio, or  
2
• Specify the A4, B5, Letter, Legal,  
16K.  
1
Executive, 8 × 13 inches, 8 / × 13  
2
inches, Folio, or 16K size for the tray  
selected for printing copies. See  
Available: 2 Sided  
Copy Tray 1 or Tray performed because paper is  
2-sided copy could not be  
Specify a setting other than [Bypass Tray]  
for the [Select Paper] setting. See  
2
specified to be fed from the  
bypass tray.  
Available: IDCard  
Copy A4 or 8 1/2 x performed because the tray  
11  
ID card copy could not be  
• Using the machine's control panel,  
specify [Select Paper] to print copies  
using the A4 or Letter size paper. See  
does not contain the valid size  
paper, which are A4 or Letter  
size.  
• Select the A4 or Letter size paper for  
the tray selected for printing copies.  
Open Frt. Cvr. then  
move Env Lvr  
up/dwn  
The fusing unit levers are not  
positioned correctly.  
The machine can start printing only if the  
fusing unit levers are in the correct  
positions for the paper type.  
• To print on an envelope, open the  
front cover, and then lower the left  
and right levers to the envelope mark.  
• To print on paper, open the front  
cover, and then raise the left and right  
levers to the plain paper mark.  
335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Message  
Causes  
Solutions  
Cannot Copy This  
Setting  
2-in-1 or 4-in-1 copy could not  
be performed because the tray  
does not contain the valid size  
paper, which are A4, Letter, or  
Legal size.  
• Using the machine's control panel,  
specify [Select Paper] to print copies  
using the A4, Letter, or Legal size  
Comb.: 2 on 1 / 4  
on 1  
Ppr.Size: B6 / 7  
1/4x10 1/2  
• Select the A4, Letter, or Legal size  
paper for the tray selected for printing  
Cannot copy.  
2-in-1, 4-in-1, or 2-sided copy  
could not be performed  
because the originals were not  
placed in the ADF.  
• Use the ADF, even when copying a  
single sheet.  
Set original to ADF.  
• If you need to use the exposure glass,  
select [Off] or [Manual 2 Sided Scan  
Mode] in [Duplex/Combine] under  
copy settings, and then try again. See  
Check Paper Size  
Check Paper Type  
The paper size set for the  
document differs from the size of press [JobReset] to cancel the job.  
the paper in the indicated tray.  
Press [FormFeed] to begin printing, or  
The paper type set for the  
document differs from the type  
of the paper in the indicated  
tray.  
Press [FormFeed] to begin printing, or  
press [JobReset] to cancel the job.  
Connection Failed  
The line could not be connected  
correctly.  
• Check if the telephone line cord is  
properly connected to the machine.  
• Disconnect the telephone line from  
the machine, and connect the cord to  
a telephone. Check if you can make  
calls using the telephone. If you  
cannot make calls this way, contact  
your telephone company.  
Cover open  
A cover is open.  
Close the cover completely.  
Density Sensor  
Require Cleaning  
The machine failed to adjust  
color registration.  
Clean the toner density sensor. See  
336  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error and Status Messages on the Screen  
Message  
Dest. is not  
Causes  
Solutions  
No Quick Dial entry is  
associated with the One Touch  
button you pressed.  
• Press a different One Touch button.  
Programmed  
• Assign a registered destination to the  
Dial Failed  
The fax could not be sent.  
• Check if the fax number you dialed is  
correct.  
• Check if the destination is a fax  
machine.  
• Check if the line is not busy.  
• You may need to insert a pause  
between dial digits. Press the [Pause/  
Redial] key after, for example, the  
area code.  
• Check that [PSTN / PBX] in [Admin.  
Tools] has been specified in  
accordance with the telephone line in  
Exceeded Max.E-  
mail Size  
The scan file exceeds the size  
limit for files that can be sent  
through e-mail.  
• Configure [Resolution] under scanner  
settings to reduce the scanning  
• Configure [Max. E-mail Size] under  
scanner settings to increase the  
Failed to Access File The Scan to USB function failed Use a USB flash disk that is not password-  
Press Clear key  
because the machine could not or write-protected.  
access the USB flash disk  
properly.  
Failed to Create File The Scan to USB function failed Use a USB flash disk with enough memory.  
Press Clear key  
because there was not enough  
memory on the USB flash disk.  
337  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Message  
Causes  
Solutions  
Fax Job Memory  
Overflow  
The number of fax jobs in  
Wait until pending jobs have been  
transmitted or printed.  
memory (unsent or unprinted  
faxes) has reached maximum,  
so new jobs cannot be stored.  
Indep.Sply.Toner: X  
A non-supported print cartridge Remove and replace it with a print  
is installed for the indicated  
color.  
cartridge specified by an authorized  
dealer.  
Internal Misfeed  
Paper has been jammed in the  
machine.  
Memory Overflow  
• The data is too large or  
complex to print.  
• Select [600 x 600 1bit] in  
[Resolution] under [Printer Features]  
to reduce the size of data. See  
• If you try to print a Locked  
Print file stored in the  
machine with the printer  
driver's [Gradation:] set to  
[Fine] in the [Print Quality]  
tab, printing may be  
canceled depending on  
the machine's current  
memory usage.  
• Print or delete other Locked Print files  
in the machine, and then print the  
Locked Print file that the machine  
failed to print. Alternately, resend the  
Locked Print file to the machine with  
[Gradation:] set to [Speed] or  
[Standard], and then print the Locked  
Print file.  
• When performing printing  
on Legal size paper under  
certain print quality setting,  
print data becomes too  
large and the job may be  
canceled.  
• If using the PCL printer driver, set  
[Gradation:] in [Print Quality] to  
[Speed] or [Standard]. If using the  
PostScript 3 printer driver, set [Print  
Quality] in [Printer Features] to  
[Standard] or [High Quality].  
Memory Overflow  
• The machine's memory  
Resend the fax in parts as several smaller  
reached its capacity while faxes, or send at a lower resolution.  
scanning the first page of  
the original to store a fax  
job in memory before  
transmission.  
• The machine's memory  
reached its capacity while  
sending a fax via LAN-Fax.  
338  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error and Status Messages on the Screen  
Message  
Causes  
Solutions  
Misfeed: Dup. Unit  
Remove Paper  
Paper has been jammed in the  
duplex unit.  
Misfeed: Paper Tray Paper has been jammed in the  
paper tray.  
Misfeed: Stnd. Tray  
Misfeed: Tray 1  
Misfeed: Tray 2  
Paper has been jammed in the  
paper exit area.  
Paper has been jammed in the  
Tray 1 paper input area.  
Paper has been jammed in the  
Tray 2 paper input area.  
Net Communication  
Error  
Connection with the server was Contact the network administrator.  
lost while sending or receiving  
data.  
On Hook or Stop key The machine has been off-hook Put down the handset or press the [Clear/  
for an extended period of time. Stop] key.  
Out of Paper: X  
The indicated tray has run out of Load paper to the indicated tray. See  
paper.  
Please Restart  
Machine  
The machine needs to be  
restarted.  
Turn off the power, and then turn it back  
on.  
Remove Paper:  
Bypass Tray  
The machine failed to proceed  
with the print job, because Tray  
1 or Tray 2 was specified as the  
input tray but paper was loaded  
in the bypass tray.  
Remove paper from the bypass tray.  
Replace IntTrans. Belt The transfer belt is no longer  
usable, and must be replaced.  
Contact your sales or service  
representative.  
Replace Required  
Soon:  
The print cartridge is almost  
empty.  
Prepare a new print cartridge.  
Toner Cartridge (X)  
Replace Required  
Soon:  
The waste toner bottle needs to Prepare a new waste toner bottle.  
be replaced soon.  
Waste Toner Bottle  
339  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Message  
Causes  
Solutions  
RX Comm. Error  
A reception error occurred, and If possible, contact the sender of the fax  
the fax could not be received  
correctly.  
and ask them to resend it.  
Scan (NW)  
Disconnected  
A scanned file could not be sent Reconnect the Ethernet cable properly,  
because the Ethernet cable was and then try the operation again.  
not connected properly.  
Scan (USB)  
Disconnected  
The USB cable was  
disconnected while scanning  
from a computer.  
Reconnect the USB cable properly, and  
then try the operation again.  
Server Connection  
Failed  
A scanned file could not be sent Check if the destination is registered  
because the destination could  
not be reached.  
correctly, and then try the operation again.  
Server Response  
Error  
An error occurred in  
communication with the server  
before beginning transmission.  
Check if the destination is registered  
correctly, and then try the operation again.  
If the problem persists, contact the network  
administrator.  
Service call - SCXXX A fatal hardware error has  
occurred, and the machine  
Contact your sales or service  
representative.  
cannot function.  
Set Correct Paper  
The tray selected in [Select  
Paper Tray] under [Fax  
Features] does not contain A4,  
Letter, or Legal size paper.  
While the message is displayed, press the  
[OK] key. A menu for changing the paper  
size specified for the current tray appears.  
Load A4/Letter/ Legal size paper in the  
tray, and then select the corresponding  
paper size using [ ] or [ ] key and press  
the [OK] key. The machine will print out the  
fax.  
Note that the paper size setting for the tray  
under tray paper settings will be changed.  
340  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error and Status Messages on the Screen  
Message  
Causes  
Solutions  
Set Original to ADF  
Scanning could not be  
• Use the ADF, even when scanning  
A4/Letter or smaller size originals.  
performed because the originals  
were not placed in the ADF,  
even though the machine setting  
has been specified to scan  
originals larger than A4/Letter  
size (scannable only with the  
ADF).  
Cannot use exposure  
glass  
• If you need to use the exposure glass,  
select A4/Letter or smaller size in  
[Scan Size] under scanner settings,  
with set. in [Scan  
Size].  
Sort Copy was  
Cancelled  
The machine's memory reached Press [Exit] to print the originals that were  
its capacity while originals were successfully scanned into memory. Then,  
being scanned from the ADF to copy again the originals left in the ADF.  
perform sort copying.  
Setting Error:  
The waste toner bottle has been Reinstall the waste toner bottle. See  
installed incorrectly.  
Waste Toner Bottle  
TX Comm. Error  
A transmission error occurred,  
and the fax could not be  
transmitted correctly.  
If the [Auto Redial] setting is enabled, the  
machine will redial the number and try  
again. If all attempts fail, or if the machine  
is in Immediate Transmission mode, the fax  
will not be transmitted. Try the operation  
again.  
Unavailable Paper  
Type  
2-sided copy could not be  
performed because the tray  
does not contain the valid type  
paper, which is thin, plain,  
middle thick, recycled, color,  
preprinted or prepunched.  
• Specify the tray containing the valid  
type paper (other than the bypass  
tray) in the [Select Paper] setting. See  
• Specify the valid paper type for the  
tray selected for printing copies. See  
Unsupported Device The Scan to USB function failed Use a USB flash disk that is compatible  
Please Remove  
because a USB device other  
than a USB flash disk or a USB  
flash disk with an unsupported  
file system was used.  
with the Scan to USB function.  
341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Troubleshooting  
Message  
Causes  
Solutions  
Unsupported USB  
The Scan to USB function failed Use a USB flash disk that is compatible  
Hub Please Remove  
because a USB device other  
than a USB flash disk or a USB  
flash disk with an unsupported  
file system was used.  
with the Scan to USB function.  
USB Disconnected  
Press Clear key  
The Scan to USB function failed Check that the USB flash disk is securely  
because the USB flash disk was inserted in the machine. Do not pull out the  
removed before the operation  
could be completed.  
USB flash disk until "Ready" appears on  
the display.  
USB Memory  
The Scan to USB function failed Use a USB flash disk with enough memory.  
Overflow Press Clear because there was not enough  
key  
memory on the USB flash disk.  
Write Protect Press  
Clear key  
The Scan to USB function failed Use a USB flash disk that is not password-  
because the machine could not or write-protected.  
access the USB flash disk  
properly.  
• The message about intermediate transfer unit, fusing unit, and transfer roller appear only for the  
Type 2 model.  
342  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Appendix  
Functions and Network Settings Available in  
an IPv6 Environment  
The functions and network settings of this machine that are available in an IPv6 environment differ from  
those available in an IPv4 environment. Make sure the functions you use are supported in an IPv6  
environment, and then configure the necessary network settings.  
Available Functions  
FTP Printing  
Prints documents via FTP using the EPRT and EPSV commands. An FTP client that complies with RFC  
2428 (an IPv6-capable operating system and IPv6-capable FTP application) is required to use  
these commands.  
Printer  
Prints documents using the printer driver.  
Scan to FTP  
Delivers files that have been scanned using the control panel to an FTP server.  
Scan to E-mail  
Sends files scanned using the control panel via e-mail.  
Scan to Folder  
Sends files scanned using the control panel to a shared folder on a computer on the network.  
This function is not available on Mac OS X.  
Network TWAIN Server  
Controls the scanning function from a computer on the network, and delivers scanned data to the  
computer directly. This function is available only to computers that have a TWAIN-supporting  
application. The IP address of the multi-cast group supported by IPv6 is ff12::fb88:1.  
Bonjour  
Allows the machine to communicate with Bonjour protocol-supported computers on the network.  
The IP address of the multi-cast group supported by IPv6 is ff02::fb.  
LAN-Fax  
Sends a document created in an application as a fax and without printing it.  
343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
11. Appendix  
Web Image Monitor  
Allows you to check the machine's status and configure its settings using a Web browser.  
Configuration Page  
Prints a configuration page that shows you the machine's configuration, IP address, and other  
details.  
Internet Fax  
Transmission and reception of Internet Faxes.  
344  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Using IPsec  
Transmission Using IPsec  
For securer communications, this machine supports the IPsec protocol. When applied, IPsec encrypts  
data packets at the network layer using shared key encryption. The machine uses encryption key  
exchange to create a shared key for both sender and receiver. To achieve even higher security, you can  
also renew the shared key on a validity period basis.  
• IPsec is not applied to data obtained through DHCP, DNS, or WINS.  
• IPsec compatible operating systems are Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista/7, Windows Server  
2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2, Mac OS X 10.6 and later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux WS 4.0,  
and Solaris 10. However, some setting items are not supported depending on the operating  
system. Make sure the IPsec settings you specify are consistent with the operating system's IPsec  
settings.  
• If you cannot access Web Image Monitor due to IPsec configuration problems, disable IPsec under  
[Admin. Tools] on the control panel, and then access Web Image Monitor.  
Encryption and Authentication by IPsec  
IPsec consists of two main functions: the encryption function, which ensures the confidentiality of data,  
and the authentication function, which verifies the sender of the data and the data's integrity. This  
machine's IPsec function supports two security protocols: the ESP protocol, which enables both of the  
IPsec functions at the same time, and the AH protocol, which enables only the authentication function.  
ESP Protocol  
The ESP protocol provides secure transmission through both encryption and authentication. This  
protocol does not provide header authentication.  
• For successful encryption, both the sender and receiver must specify the same encryption  
algorithm and encryption key. The encryption algorithm and encryption key are specified  
automatically.  
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication  
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are  
specified automatically.  
345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
11. Appendix  
AH Protocol  
The AH protocol provides secure transmission through authentication of packets only, including  
headers.  
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication  
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are  
specified automatically.  
AH Protocol + ESP Protocol  
When combined, the ESP and AH protocols provide secure transmission through both encryption  
and authentication. These protocols provide header authentication.  
• For successful encryption, both the sender and receiver must specify the same encryption  
algorithm and encryption key. The encryption algorithm and encryption key are specified  
automatically.  
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication  
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are  
specified automatically.  
• Some operating systems use the term "Compliance" in place of "Authentication".  
Security Association  
This machine uses encryption key exchange as the key setting method. With this method, agreements  
such as the IPsec algorithm and key must be specified for both sender and receiver. Such agreements  
form what is known as an SA (Security Association). IPsec communication is possible only if the  
receiver's and sender's SA settings are identical.  
The SA settings are auto configured on both parties' machines. However, before the IPsec SA can be  
established, the ISAKMP SA (Phase 1) settings must be auto configured. When this is done, the IPsec SA  
(Phase 2) settings, which allow actual IPsec transmission, will be auto configured.  
Also, for further security, the SA can be periodically auto updated by applying a validity period (time  
limit) for its settings. This machine only supports IKEv1 for encryption key exchange.  
Multiple settings can be configured in the SA.  
Settings 1-10  
You can configure ten separate sets of SA details (such as different shared keys and IPsec  
algorithms).  
IPsec policies are searched through one by one, starting at [No.1].  
346  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transmission Using IPsec  
Encryption Key Exchange Settings Configuration Flow  
This section explains the procedure for specifying encryption key exchange settings.  
Machine  
PC  
1. Set the same IPsec settings as the machine on  
PC.  
1. Set the IPsec settings on Web Image Monitor.  
2. Enable IPsec settings.  
2. Enable IPsec settings.  
3. Confirm IPsec transmission.  
• After configuring IPsec, you can use "ping" command to check if the connection is established  
correctly. Because the response is slow during initial key exchange, it may take some time to  
confirm that transmission has been established.  
• If you cannot access Web Image Monitor due to IPsec configuration problems, disable IPsec on  
the control panel, and then access Web Image Monitor.  
Specifying Encryption Key Exchange Settings  
• [IPsec Settings] appears only if the administrator password has been configured.  
Specify it using Web Image Monitor.  
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.  
2. Click [IPsec Settings].  
3. Click the [IPsec Policy List] tab.  
4. Select the number of the setting you want to modify in the list, and then click [Change].  
5. Modify the IPsec related settings as necessary.  
6. Enter the administrator password, and then click [Apply].  
7. Click the [IPsec Global Settings] tab, and then select [Active] in [IPsec Function].  
8. If necessary, specify [Default Policy], [Broadcast and Multicast Bypass], and [All ICMP  
Bypass] also.  
9. Enter the administrator password, and then click [Apply].  
347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11. Appendix  
Specifying IPsec Settings on the Computer  
Specify exactly the same settings for IPsec SA settings on your computer as are specified for the IPsec  
Settings on the machine. Setting methods differ according to the computer's operating system. The  
following procedure is based on Windows 7 in an IPv4 environment as an example.  
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then click  
[Administrative Tools].  
2. Double-click [Local Security Policy], and then click [IP Security Policies on Local  
Computer].  
3. In the "Action" menu, click [Create IP Security Policy...].  
The IP Security Policy Wizard appears.  
4. Click [Next].  
5. Enter a security policy name in "Name", and then click [Next].  
6. Clear the "Activate the default response rule (earlier versions of Windows only)." check  
box, and then click [Next].  
7. Select "Edit properties", and then click [Finish].  
8. In the "General" tab, click [Settings...].  
9. In "Authenticate and generate a new key after every", enter the same validity period (in  
minutes) that is specified on the machine in [IKE Life Time], and then click [Methods...].  
10. Confirm that the Encryption Algorithm ("Encryption"), Hash Algorithm ("Integrity"), and  
IKE Diffie-Hellman Group ("Diffie-Hellman Group") settings in "Security method  
preference order" all match those specified on the machine in [IKE Settings].  
If the settings are not displayed, click [Add...].  
11. Click [OK] twice.  
12. Click [Add...] in the "Rules" tab.  
The Security Rule Wizard appears.  
13. Click [Next].  
14. Select "This rule does not specify a tunnel", and then click [Next].  
15. Select the type of network for IPsec, and then click [Next].  
16. Click [Add...] in the IP Filter List.  
17. In [Name], enter an IP Filter name, and then click [Add...].  
The IP Filter Wizard appears.  
18. Click [Next].  
348  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Transmission Using IPsec  
19. In [Description:], enter a name or a detailed explanation of the IP filter, and then click  
[Next].  
You may click [Next] and proceed to the next step without entering any information in this field.  
20. Select "My IP Address" in "Source address", and then click [Next].  
21. Select "A specific IP Address or Subnet" in "Destination address", enter the machine's IP  
address, and then click [Next].  
22. For the IPsec protocol type, select "Any", and then click [Next].  
23. Click [Finish], and then click [OK].  
24. Select the IP filter that you have just created, and then click [Next].  
25. Click [Add...] in the Filter Action.  
The Filter Action Wizard appears.  
26. Click [Next].  
27. In [Name], enter a Filter Action name, and then click [Next].  
28. Select "Negotiate security", and then click [Next].  
29. Select one of options for computers allowed to communicate with, and then click [Next].  
30. Select "Custom" and click [Settings...].  
31. When [ESP] is selected for the machine in [Security Protocol] under [IPsec Settings], select  
[Data integrity and encryption (ESP)], and configure the following settings:  
Set the value of [Integrity algorithm] to the same value as the [Authentication Algorithm for ESP]  
specified on the machine.  
Set the value of [Encryption algorithm] to the same value as the [Encryption Algorithm for ESP]  
specified on the machine.  
32. When [AH] is selected for the machine in [Security Protocol] under [IPsec Settings], select  
[Data and address integrity without encryption (AH)], and configure the following  
settings:  
Set the value of [Integrity algorithm] to the same value as the [Authentication Algorithm for AH]  
specified on the machine.  
Clear the [Data integrity and encryption (ESP)] check box.  
33. When [ESP&AH] is selected for the machine in [Security Protocol] under [IPsec Settings],  
select [Data and address integrity without encryption (AH)], and configure the following  
settings:  
Set the value of [Integrity algorithm] under [Data and address integrity without encryption (AH)] to  
the same value as [Authentication Algorithm for AH] specified on the machine.  
Set the value of [Encryption algorithm] under [Data integrity and encryption (ESP)] to the same  
value as [Encryption Algorithm for ESP] specified on the machine.  
349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Appendix  
34. In the Session key settings, select "Generate a new key every", and enter the same  
validity period (in [Seconds] or [Kbytes]) as that specified for [Life Time] on the machine.  
35. Click [OK], and then click [Next].  
36. Click [Finish].  
If you are using IPv6 under Windows Vista or a newer version of Windows, you must repeat this  
procedure from Step 12 and specify ICMPv6 as an exception. When you reach Step 22, select  
[58] as the protocol number for the "Other" target protocol type, and then set [Negotiate security]  
to [Permit].  
37. Select the filter action that you have just created, and then click [Next].  
38. Select one of options for an authentication method, and then click [Next].  
39. Click [Finish], and then click [OK] twice.  
The new IP security policy (IPsec settings) is specified.  
40. Select the security policy that you have just created, right click on it, and then click  
[Assign].  
IPsec settings on the computer are enabled.  
• To disable the computer's IPsec settings, select the security policy, right click, and then click [Un-  
assign].  
Enabling and Disabling IPsec Using the Control Panel  
1. Press the [User Tools] key.  
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.  
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,  
and then press the [OK] key.  
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [IPsec], and then press the [OK] key.  
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Active] or [Inactive], and then press the [OK] key.  
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.  
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock]. For  
350  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notes About the Toner  
Notes About the Toner  
• Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if any third-party toner is used.  
• Depending on printing conditions, there are cases where the printer cannot print the number of  
sheets indicated in the specifications.  
• Replace the print cartridge if the printed image suddenly becomes pale or blurred.  
• When operating the machine for the first time, use the print cartridge supplied with this machine. If  
this cartridge is not initially used, the following problems may occur:  
• "Replace Required Soon:" "Toner Cartridge (X)" will be displayed before the toner runs out.  
• "Replace Toner: X" will be displayed when the toner runs out, but instead the printed image  
suddenly becomes pale or blurred.  
• The lifetime of the photo conductor, which is built into the print cartridge, is taken into account in  
displaying "Replace Required Soon:" "Toner Cartridge (X)". If the photo conductor stops working  
before the toner runs out, "Replace Required Soon:" "Toner Cartridge (X)" may be displayed.  
351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. Appendix  
Moving and Transporting the Machine  
This section provides cautions that you must follow when moving the machine both short and long  
distances.  
Repack the machine in its original packing materials when moving it over a long distance.  
• Be sure to disconnect all cables from the machine before transporting it.  
• The machine is a precision piece of machinery. Be sure to handle it carefully when moving it.  
• Make sure to move the machine horizontally. Take extra caution when carrying the machine up or  
down stairs.  
• If Tray 2 is installed, remove it from the machine, and move them separately.  
• Do not remove the print cartridge when moving the machine.  
• Be sure to hold the machine level while carrying it. To prevent toner from spilling, move the  
machine carefully.  
1. Be sure to check the following points:  
• The power switch is turned off.  
• The power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.  
• All other cables are unplugged from the machine.  
2. If Tray 2 is installed, remove it.  
3. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides of the machine, and then move it  
horizontally to the place where you want to use it.  
4. If you have removed Tray 2, reinstall it.  
• To move the machine over a long distance, pack it well and empty all the paper trays. Take care  
not to tip or tilt the machine during transit.  
• Toner might spill inside the machine if the machine is not kept level during transit.  
• For more information about moving the machine, contact your sales or service representative.  
Disposal  
Ask your sales or service representative for information about correct disposal of this machine.  
352  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Moving and Transporting the Machine  
Where to Inquire  
Contact your sales or service representative for further information about the topics included in this  
manual or to inquire about other topics not included in this manual.  
353  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11. Appendix  
Consumables  
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality, and we  
recommend that you use only the expendable supplies available at an authorized dealer.  
Print Cartridge  
*1  
Print cartridge  
Average printable number of pages per cartridge  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
Black  
Type1:  
• 2,000 pages  
(mainly North America)  
• 2,300 pages  
Type2:  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
• 4,500 pages  
(mainly North America)  
• 4,500 pages, 6,500 pages  
Type1:  
Cyan  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
• 1,600 pages  
(mainly North America)  
• 2,300 pages  
Type2:  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
• 4,000 pages  
(mainly North America)  
• 4,000 pages, 6,000 pages  
354  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Consumables  
*1  
Print cartridge  
Average printable number of pages per cartridge  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
Magenta  
Type1:  
• 1,600 pages  
(mainly North America)  
• 2,300 pages  
Type2:  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
• 4,000 pages  
(mainly North America)  
• 4,000 pages, 6,000 pages  
Type1:  
Yellow  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
• 1,600 pages  
(mainly North America)  
• 2,300 pages  
Type2:  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
• 4,000 pages  
(mainly North America)  
• 4,000 pages, 6,000 pages  
The printable number of pages is based on pages that are compliant with ISO/IEC 19798 and the image  
density set as the factory default. ISO/IEC 19798 is an international standard on measurement of printable  
pages, set by the International Organization for Standardization.  
*1  
• If print cartridges are not changed when necessary, printing will become impossible. For easy  
replacement, we recommend you purchase and store extra print cartridges.  
• The actual number of printable pages varies depending on the image volume and density, number  
of pages printed at a time, paper type and paper size used, and environmental conditions such as  
temperature and humidity.  
• Print cartridges may need to be changed sooner than indicated above due to deterioration over  
the period of use.  
355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Appendix  
• Print cartridges (consumables) are not covered by warranty. However, if there is a problem,  
contact the store where they were purchased.  
• When you first use this machine, use the four print cartridges packaged with the machine.  
• The supplied print cartridges are good for approximately 1,000 pages.  
• This machine routinely performs cleaning and uses toner during this operation to maintain quality.  
• To prevent a cleaning malfunction, you may need to replace a print cartridge even if it is not empty.  
Waste Toner Bottle  
*1  
Name  
Average printable number of pages  
Waste Toner Bottle SP C220  
25,000 pages  
A4/Letter 5% test chart, 3 pages per job, printing in 50% black and white/color.  
*1  
• The actual number of printable pages varies depending on the image volume and density, number  
of pages printed at a time, paper type and paper size used, and environmental conditions such as  
temperature and humidity.  
• If the waste toner bottle is not changed when necessary, printing will become impossible. For easy  
replacement, we recommend you purchase and store extra waste toner bottles.  
356  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications of the Machine  
Specifications of the Machine  
This section lists the machine's specifications.  
General Function Specifications  
Configuration  
Desktop  
Print process  
Laser electrostatic transfer  
Maximum paper size for scanning using the exposure glass  
1
A4, Letter (8 / × 11 inches)  
2
Maximum paper size for scanning using the ADF  
1
Legal (8 / × 14 inches)  
2
Maximum paper size for printing  
1
Legal (8 / × 14 inches)  
2
Warm-up time  
30 seconds or less (23 °C, 71.6 °F)  
Paper sizes  
• Standard paper sizes  
A4, B5 JIS, A5, A6, Legal (8 / × 14 inches), Letter (8 / × 11 inches), Half Letter (5 / ×  
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
8 / inches), Executive (7 / × 10 / inches), 8 × 13 inches, B6 JIS, 8 / × 13 inches,  
2
4
2
2
1
1
1
Folio (8 / × 13 inches), 16K (195 × 267 mm), Com10 (4 / × 9 / inches), Monarch  
(3 / × 7 / inches), C5 Env (162 × 229 mm), C6 Env (114 × 162 mm), DL Env (110 ×  
4
1
8
2
7
8
2
220 mm)  
• Custom size  
90 to 216 mm (3.54 to 8.5 inches) in width, 148 to 356 mm (5.83 to 14.0 inches) in length  
• Duplex supported paper sizes  
1
1
1
1
A4, B5 JIS, Legal (8 / × 14 inches), Letter (8 / × 11 inches), Executive (7 / × 10 /  
2
2
2
4
1
1
inches), 8 / × 13 inches, Folio (8 / × 13 inches ), 8 inches × 13 inches, 16K (195 × 267  
2
4
mm)  
Paper type  
Thin Paper  
Plain Paper  
Middle Thick Paper  
357  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11. Appendix  
Thick Paper 1  
Thick Paper 2  
Recycled Paper  
Color Paper  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Letterhead  
Bond Paper  
Cardstock  
Label Paper  
Envelope  
2
Paper output capacity (80 g/m , 20 lb)  
150 sheets  
2
Paper input capacity (80 g/m , 20 lb)  
• Tray 1  
250 sheets  
• Tray 2 (option)  
500 sheets  
• Bypass tray  
One sheet  
2
ADF capacity (80 g/m , 20 lb)  
35 sheets  
Memory  
256 MB  
Power requirements  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
220-240 V, 6 A, 50/60 Hz  
(mainly North America)  
120-127 V, 11 A, 60 Hz  
Power consumption  
• Maximum power consumption  
1300 W or less  
• Energy Saver mode 1  
358  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications of the Machine  
80 W or less  
• Energy Saver mode 2  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
3.8 W or less  
(mainly North America)  
3.2 W or less  
The power level when the main switch is turned off and the power cord is plugged into an  
outlet: 1W or less.  
Recovery time and power consumption may differ depending on the conditions and environment  
of the machine.  
*
Machine dimensions (Width × Depth × Height)  
420 × 493 × 460 mm (16.6 × 19.5 ×18.2 inches) or less  
Weight (machine body with consumables)  
29 kg (64 lb.) or less  
Printer Function Specifications  
Printing speed  
Black and white: 20 pages per minute (A4), 21 pages per minute (Letter)  
Color: 20 pages per minute (A4), 21 pages per minute (Letter)  
Resolution  
600 × 600 dpi  
First print speed  
14 seconds or less (A4/Letter, 600 × 600 dpi)  
Interface  
• Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX)  
• Wi-Fi  
• USB2.0  
• USB2.0 Host  
Printer language  
PCL6, PCL5c, PostScript3, PictBridge  
Fonts  
80 fonts  
359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. Appendix  
Network protocol  
TCP/IP, IPP, Bonjour  
Copier Function Specifications  
Maximum resolution (scanning and printing)  
• Exposure glass  
Scanning: 600 × 600 dpi  
Printing: 600 × 600 dpi  
• ADF  
Scanning: 300 × 600 dpi  
Printing: 600 × 600 dpi  
Gradation  
Scanning: 256 levels  
Printing: Four-value  
First copy speed (A4, at 23 °C, 71.6 °F)  
20 seconds or less  
Multiple copy speed (except for Europe)  
• Black and white  
20 pages per minute  
Duplex printing: 12 pages per minute  
• Full Color  
20 pages per minute  
Duplex printing: 12 pages per minute  
Reproduction ratio  
(mainly Europe and Asia)  
Fixed ratio: 50%, 71%, 82%, 93%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%  
Zoom ratio: 25% to 400%  
(mainly North America)  
Fixed ratio: 50%, 65%, 78%, 93%, 129%, 155%, 200%, 400%  
Zoom ratio: 25% to 400%  
Copy quantity  
99  
360  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications of the Machine  
Scanner Function Specifications  
Maximum scanning area (horizontal × vertical)  
• Exposure glass  
216 × 297 mm (8.5 × 11.7 inches)  
• ADF  
216 × 356 mm (8.5 ×14 inches)  
Maximum resolution when scanning from the control panel (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan  
to Folder, Scan to USB)  
• Exposure glass  
600 × 600 dpi  
• ADF  
300 × 300 dpi  
Maximum resolution when scanning from a computer (TWAIN)  
• Exposure glass  
19200 ×19200 dpi  
• ADF  
600 ×600 dpi  
Maximum resolution when scanning from a computer (WIA)  
• Exposure glass  
600 × 600 dpi  
• ADF  
600 × 600 dpi  
Gradation  
Input: 16 bit color processing  
Output: 8 bit color processing  
Scanning time  
Black and white: 5 seconds or less  
Color: 10 seconds or less (A4/200 dpi/Compressed)  
Not including transfer time.  
ADF throughput  
Black and white: 20 image per minute (200 dpi/A4  
Full Color: 12 image per minute (200 dpi/A4  
)
)
361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. Appendix  
Interface  
• Scanning from the control panel  
Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX) , USB2.0 (Scan to USB)  
• Scanning from a computer  
Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX), USB 2.0  
Sendable file formats  
TIFF, JPEG, PDF  
Address book  
Maximum 100 items  
Number of redials: 1  
Fax Function Specifications  
Fax transmission and reception  
Access line  
• Public switched telephone networks (PSTN)  
• Private branch exchange (PBX)  
Transmission mode  
ITU-T Group 3 (G3)  
Scan line density  
8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm (200 × 100 dpi)  
8 dots per mm × 7.7 line per mm (200 × 200 dpi)  
Transmission time  
3–4 seconds (8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm, 33.6 kbps, MMR, ITU-T # 1 chart)  
Transfer rate  
33.6 kbps to 2400 bps (auto shift down system)  
Data compression method  
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG  
Memory capacity  
More than 100 sheets (8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm)  
Address book  
• Speed dial  
200 items  
362  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications of the Machine  
• Quick dial  
20 items  
• Number of redials for Fax  
1
Internet Fax transmission and reception  
Interface  
Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX), Wi-Fi  
Communication protocols  
• Transmission  
SMTP, TCP/IP  
• Reception  
POP3, TCP/IP  
Transmission function  
E-mail  
E-mail format  
Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion  
Attached file forms (transmission): TIFF-S (MH encoding)  
Attached file forms (reception): TIFF-S/TIFF-F (MH/MR/MMR encoding)  
Authentication method  
SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP  
Original size  
A4 (Length is up to 356 mm)  
Scan line density  
8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm (200 × 100 dpi)  
8 dots per mm × 7.7 line per mm (200 × 200 dpi)  
Destination machine specifications  
• Communication protocols  
• Transmission  
SMTP, TCP/IP  
• Reception  
POP3, TCP/IP  
• E-mail format  
363  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11. Appendix  
• Format  
MIME, Base64  
• Content-Type  
Image/tiff  
Multipart/mixed (text/plain, Image/tiff (attached file forms))  
• Data format  
• Profile  
TIFF-S  
• Encoding  
MH  
• Original size  
A4  
• Resolution (dpi)  
200 × 100, 200 × 200  
364  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications of Options  
Specifications of Options  
This section lists the specifications of the various options.  
Paper Feed Unit TK1010  
Paper capacity  
500 sheets  
Paper size  
1
A4, Letter (8 / × 11 inches)  
2
Dimensions (Width × Depth × Height)  
400 × 450 × 127 mm (15.8 × 17.8 × 5 inches)  
Paper weight  
2
60 to 105 g/m (16 to 28 lb.)  
Weight  
Less than 4 kg (8.9 lb.)  
365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
11. Appendix  
Copyright Information about Installed  
Applications  
expat  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Centre, Ltd. and Clark Cooper.  
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002 Expat maintainers.  
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and  
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including  
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell  
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the  
following conditions:  
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial  
portions of the Software.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR  
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN  
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN  
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.  
Iperf  
Copyright (c) The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois  
All Rights Reserved.  
Iperf performance test  
Mark Gates  
Ajay Tirumala  
Jim Ferguson  
Jon Dugan  
Feng Qin  
Kevin Gibbs  
John Estabrook  
National Laboratory for Applied Network Research  
National Center for Supercomputing Applications  
366  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Copyright Information about Installed Applications  
University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign  
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software (Iperf) and  
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including  
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell  
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the  
following conditions:  
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimers.  
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the  
distribution.  
• Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its contributors may be used  
to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  
CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER  
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT  
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE  
SOFTWARE.  
WPA Supplicant  
Copyright (c) 2003-2011, Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> and contributors All Rights Reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and /or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. Neither the name (s) of the above-listed copyright holder (s) nor the names of its contributors may be  
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND  
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. Appendix  
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON  
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,  
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
368  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademarks  
Trademarks  
Bonjour, Mac OS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.  
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.  
LINUX is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Internet Explorer are either registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
PostScript is a registered trademark or trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.  
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their  
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.  
PictBridge is a trademark.  
®
®
The proper name of Internet Explorer 6 is Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.  
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:  
• The product names of Windows XP are as follows:  
®
®
Microsoft Windows XP Professional  
®
®
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition  
®
®
Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 Edition  
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista Business  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise  
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:  
®
®
Microsoft Windows 7 Starter  
®
®
Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium  
®
®
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional  
®
®
Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate  
®
®
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise  
• The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:  
369  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. Appendix  
®
®
®
Microsoft Windows  
8
®
Microsoft Windows 8 Pro  
®
®
Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise  
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Web Edition  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition  
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Datacenter Edition  
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Foundation  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Datacenter  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 for Itanium-based Systems  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Web Server 2008  
®
®
Microsoft Windows HPC Server 2008  
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Foundation  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Datacenter  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 for Itanium-based Systems  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Web Server R2 2008  
®
®
Microsoft Windows HPC Server R2 2008  
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Foundation  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Essentials  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Datacenter  
370  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Cover sheet..........................................................174  
D
2-sided copy....................................................... 109  
Date......................................................................145  
Date and time settings.........................................270  
Date setting..........................................................270  
Default settings.................................................... 268  
Density..................................................................137  
DHCP............................................................... 42, 44  
A
Address book..............................................122, 208  
Address book (LAN-Fax)...........................172, 174  
ADF.......................................................................294  
ADF (Auto Document Feeder).............................. 82  
Administrator password............................... 10, 268  
Administrator settings................................. 228, 268  
Attaching Paper Feed Unit TK1010.................... 30  
Authentication......................................................345  
Authorized reception..................................186, 247  
Auto e-mail notification settings......................... 256  
Differences in functions between different models..  
................................................................................ 10  
Digital camera....................................................... 95  
Direct printing........................................................ 95  
Disclaimer.................................................................9  
DNS setting..........................................................255  
Duplex..................................................................240  
B
E
B&W print priority............................................... 249  
Backup settings....................................................269  
Basic operation........................... 87, 104, 129, 189  
Bond paper............................................................60  
Broadcast function.............................................. 162  
Bypass tray....................................................75, 242  
Bypass tray setting priority................................. 241  
E-mail notification 1............................................ 256  
E-mail notification 2............................................ 256  
Economy Color Prints..........................................239  
Encryption............................................................345  
Encryption key exchange................................... 347  
Energy saver mode.......................................17, 271  
Enlarged or reduced copies...............................107  
Entering characters............................................. 146  
Envelope..........................................................60, 76  
Error messages.................................................... 334  
expat.................................................................... 366  
Exposure glass.............................................. 82, 294  
Extending tray 1.................................................... 73  
Exterior................................................................... 19  
C
Canceling a copy................................................105  
Canceling a fax...................................................170  
Canceling a Transmission...................................157  
Cardstock...............................................................60  
Cleaning............................285, 286, 288, 291, 294  
Color paper........................................................... 60  
Combine copy.....................................................109  
Community...........................................................257  
Confidential document..........................................90  
Configuration page....................................218, 267  
Consumables.......................................................354  
Control panel.........................................................24  
Copier features....................................................193  
Copier function....................................................360  
Copier mode screen........................................... 103  
Copy key................................................................35  
Copyright information.........................................366  
Counter information............................................ 237  
F
Facsimile key..........................................................35  
Fax destinations.........................148, 150, 152, 250  
Fax features......................................................... 202  
Fax function......................................................... 362  
Fax mode screen.................................................143  
Fax Number confirmation...................................246  
Fax only mode.....................................................177  
Fax printing..........................................................184  
Fax received file processing...............................246  
Fax transmission settings.....................................200  
371  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax TX/RX standby file list..................................267 Loading paper....................................................... 71  
FAX/TAD mode.................................................. 178 Locked Print........................................ 90, 91, 92, 93  
FAX/TEL automatic mode...................................178  
M
FAX/TEL manual mode.......................................177  
Machine information...........................................240  
Forwarding..................................................181, 182  
Maintenance page............................................. 267  
Function priority.....................................................35  
Manual 2-sided copying....................................113  
Fusing Unit........................................................... 284  
Manual IP address..........................................43, 45  
mDNS setting.......................................................254  
G
General status..................................................... 253 Memory reception......................................181, 184  
Memory transmission..........................................154  
I
Menu chart.......................................................... 191  
I/O timeout..........................................................248  
Middle Thick paper...............................................60  
ID Card copy.......................................................116  
Models................................................................... 12  
IKE settings...........................................................263  
Moving.................................................................352  
Image density............................................. 118, 167  
Multi-access...........................................................35  
Immediate transmission.......................................154  
Important safety instructions...........................13, 16  
N
Initial setup............................................................. 34 Network application...........................................254  
Installing the machine............................................27 Network print setting...........................................254  
Interior.................................................................... 23 Network settings...................................42, 224, 253  
Intermediate transfer unit.................................... 284 Network status.....................................................253  
Internet fax...........................................................259 Non-recommended paper................................... 67  
Internet Fax.........................................155, 179, 363 Notes....................................................................351  
Introduction.............................................................. 9  
O
Iperf...................................................................... 366  
On hook dial....................................................... 164  
IPsec global settings............................................263  
One Touch buttons..................................... 131, 160  
IPsec policy settings.............................................263  
Operation modes.................................................. 35  
IPsec settings........................................................263  
Operation tools..................................................... 33  
IPsec transmission................................................345  
Options................................................................ 365  
IPv6 configuration............................................... 254  
Original..................................................................82  
IPv6 environment.................................................343  
Original type....................................................... 118  
J
P
Job cancel..............................................................87  
Page counter........................................................237  
L
Paper Feed Unit TK1010.............................30, 365  
Label paper............................................................60 Paper jam..........................295, 296, 298, 300, 301  
LAN-Fax...............................................................169 Paper mismatch..................................................... 89  
Language.............................................................235 Paper recommendations.......................................82  
Legal prohibition......................................................9 Paper size...............................................................78  
Letterhead.............................................................. 60 Paper tray............................................................ 236  
List of option...........................................................11 Paper type....................................................... 60, 78  
Lists......................................................188, 218, 267 Pause/Redial key................................................131  
372  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PCL6.....................................................................272 Scanning..............................................................139  
PictBridge.................................................. 95, 96, 97 Select paper........................................................ 245  
Placing originals.................................................... 84 Select paper tray.................................................245  
Plain paper.............................................................60 Sending a fax............................................. 154, 155  
POP3 settings.......................................................259 Set date................................................................270  
Preprinted paper................................................... 60 Set time.................................................................270  
Prepunched paper.................................................60 Shortcut to Func. key...........................................249  
Print area................................................................68 Shortcut to function....................................... 40, 249  
Print cartridge..............................................273, 354 SMTP settings.......................................................258  
Print counter.........................................................237 SNMP settings..................................................... 257  
Print functions......................................................... 99 Sound volume adjustment...................................241  
Print output functions........................................... 100 Special senders.......................................... 185, 186  
Print quality functions.............................................99 Specifications...........357, 359, 360, 361, 362, 363  
Printer features.....................................................220 Speed Dial......................................... 150, 152, 161  
Printer function.....................................................359 Status information................................................236  
Priority tray...........................................................247 Status messages.................................................. 334  
Supported paper...................................................57  
R
System..................................................................257  
Receiving a fax....................................................176  
System information..............................................236  
Reception mode.................................................. 176  
System settings............................................209, 241  
Recycled paper..................................................... 60  
Redial function.....................................................163  
T
Replacing the Fusing Unit and Transfer Rollor..284 TCP/IP status....................................................... 253  
Replacing the intermediate transfer unit............ 284 Thick paper 1.........................................................60  
Reports................................................188, 218, 267 Thick paper 2.........................................................60  
Reset settings........................................................268 Thin paper..............................................................60  
Resolution....................................................138, 167 Time......................................................................145  
Restore settings....................................................270 Time setting.......................................................... 270  
Restrict user function...............................50, 54, 252 Toner...................................................236, 273, 351  
Toner saving........................................................ 248  
S
Top page............................................................. 234  
SA (Security Association)................................... 346  
Trademarks..........................................................369  
Scan destinations...................... 122, 128, 131, 250  
Transfer Rollor..................................................... 284  
Scan size..............................................................136  
Transmission mode..............................................154  
Scan to E-mail.............................................122, 129  
Trap...................................................................... 257  
Scan to Folder.............................................122, 129  
Tray 1..................................................................... 71  
Scan to FTP..................................................122, 129  
Tray 1 priority......................................................243  
Scan to USB.........................................................132  
Tray 2............................................................ 71, 242  
Scanner destination list....................................... 267  
Tray paper settings............................ 209, 215, 241  
Scanner Features Settings...................................198  
Troubleshooting........ 97, 304, 306, 309, 312, 321,  
Scanner function..................................................361  
Scanner key........................................................... 35  
Scanner mode screen......................................... 121  
Scanner send setting...........................................254  
TWAIN.................................................................139  
TWAIN scanning.................................................139  
Type name............................................................. 10  
373  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U
User code...............................................................54  
User restriction....................................................... 11  
W
Waste toner bottle...............................................278  
Web Image Monitor...........................................233  
Where to put the machine.................................... 27  
WIA......................................................................141  
Wireless LAN settings......................................... 260  
Wireless LAN setup...............................................47  
Wireless settings..................................................260  
WPA Supplicant..................................................367  
374  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
375  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
GB  
US  
376  
EN  
EN  
M204-8611  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GB  
US  
EN  
EN  
M204-8611  
© 2013  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Radio Shack Battery Charger 08A01 User Guide
RCA Clock Radio RC150I User Guide
RCA Flat Panel Television D61W130 User Guide
RIDGID Planer JP0610 User Guide
Rolls MP3 Player MX51 User Guide
Rolls Music Mixer RM70 User Guide
Samson DJ Equipment XP106W User Guide
Samsung DVD Player DVD S425 User Guide
Sanyo Projector PLC XF30NL User Guide
Sennheiser Headphones HD 560 User Guide